ctk

package module
v0.0.1 Latest Latest
Warning

This package is not in the latest version of its module.

 Go to latest Published: Mar 20, 2021 License: Apache-2.0 Imports: 12 Imported by: 0

README

CTK - Curses Tool Kit

Golang package to provide an advanced terminal user interface with a GTK2 inspired API, built upon CDK.

Notice

The current status of this project is in the v0.0.x versioning range and is entirely experimental, or rather very unfinished and implemented poorly. There were a number of fundamental misconceptions about how to approach a GTK-flavoured curses programming experience. Please do not use this project for anything other then intellectual curiosity. There's a lot here and not much is documented very well and there's no "overview" of the codebase provided at this time.

This project is in the early process of a fundamental rewrite, in conjunction with the CDK rewrite underway.

Getting Started

CTK is a Go library and as such can be used in any of the typical Golang ways.

Prerequisites

Go v1.16 (or later) is required in order to build and use the package. Beyond that, there aren't any other dependencies. Visit: https://golang.org/doc/install for installation instructions.

Installing

CTK uses the Go mod system and is installed in any of the usual ways.

go get -u github.com/kckrinke/go-ctk

CTK includes a rudimentary clone of the venerable dialog application called go-dialog and can be installed with the following:

go get github.com/kckrinke/go-ctk/cmd/go-dialog

CTK also includes a simple character-set viewer called go-charmap and can be installed with the following:

go get github.com/kckrinke/go-ctk/cmd/go-charmap

Example Usage

Hello World in CTK

The following application will display an empty window, with "Hello World" as the title and will quit when CTRL+C is pressed.

package main

import (
	"os"

	"github.com/kckrinke/go-cdk"
	"github.com/kckrinke/go-ctk"
)

func main() {
	// Construct a new CDK application
	app := cdk.NewApp(
		// program binary name
		"hello-world",
		// usage summary
		"the most basic CTK application",
		// because versioning is important
		"0.0.1",
		// used in logs, internal debugging, etc
		"helloWorld",
		// used where human-readable titles are necessary
		"Hello World",
		// the TTY device to use, /dev/tty is the default
		"/dev/tty",
		// initialize the user-interface
		func(d cdk.DisplayManager) error {
			// tell the display to listen for CTRL+C and interrupt gracefully
			d.CaptureCtrlC()
			// create a new window, give it a human-readable title
			w := ctk.NewWindowWithTitle("Hello World")
			// tell CTK that the window and it's contents are to be drawn upon
			// the terminal display
			w.ShowAll()
			// tell CDK that this window is the foreground window
			d.SetActiveWindow(w)
			// no errors to report, nil to proceed
			return nil
		},
	)
	// run the application, handing over the command-line arguments received
	if err := app.Run(os.Args); err != nil {
		// doesn't have to be a Fatal exit
		cdk.Fatal(err)
	}
	// end of program
}

Compile the hello-world.go source file, and run it!

go build example/hello-world/hello-world.go && ./hello-world

View the command-line help:

> ./hello-world --help
NAME:
   hello-world - the most basic CTK application

USAGE:
   hello-world [global options] command [command options] [arguments...]

VERSION:
   0.0.1

COMMANDS:
   help, h  Shows a list of commands or help for one command

GLOBAL OPTIONS:
   --cdk-log-file value   path to log file (default: /tmp/cdk.log) [$GO_CDK_LOG_FILE]
   --cdk-log-level value  highest level of verbosity (default: error) [$GO_CDK_LOG_LEVEL]
   --cdk-log-levels       list the levels of logging verbosity (default: false)
   --help, -h, --usage    display command-line usage information (default: false)
   --version              display the version (default: false)
More Source Examples

For more complex examples, see the go-dialog and go-charmap sources, both of which are intended as "complete project" examples to learn from and play with.

Running the unit tests

go test -v

Versioning

The current API is unstable and subject to change dramatically. The following is a brief summary of the planned iterations.

  • v0.0.x - Proof of concept, experimental
  • v0.1.x - Rewrite of CTK package, runtime systems
  • v0.2.x - Use CDK v0.2.x, functional implementation
  • v1.0.0 - First official release directly related to v1.0.0 of CDK

Authors

  • Kevin C. Krinke - Original author - kckrinke

License

This project is licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 - see the LICENSE.md file for details.

Acknowledgments

  • Thanks to TCell for providing a solid and robust platform to build upon
  • Thanks to the GTK Team for developing and maintaining the GTK2 API that CTK is modeled after

Documentation

Overview

CTK - Curses Tool Kit

The Curses Tool Kit a curses-based graphical user interface library modeled after the GTK project.

The purpose of this project is to provide a similar API to the actual GTK project and instead of interacting with an X11 server, the Curses Tool Kit interacts with a terminal display, managed by the Curses Development Kit.

CTK Type Hierarchy 

Object
  |- Adjustment
  `- Widget
     |- Container
     |  |- Bin
     |  |  |- Button
     |  |  |- EventBox
     |  |  |- Frame
     |  |  |- Viewport
     |  |  |  `- ScrolledViewport
     |  |  `- Window
     |  `- Box
     |     |- HBox
     |     `- VBox
     |- Misc
     |  |- Arrow
     |  `- Label
     |- Range
     |  |- Scale
     |  |  |- HScale
     |  |  `- VScale
     |  `- Scrollbar
     |     |- HScrollbar
     |     `- VScrollbar
     `- Sensitive

Index

Constants

View Source 
const (
	ANCHOR_CENTER AnchorType = iota
	ANCHOR_NORTH
	ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST
	ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST
	ANCHOR_SOUTH
	ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST
	ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST
	ANCHOR_WEST
	ANCHOR_EAST
	ANCHOR_N  = ANCHOR_NORTH
	ANCHOR_NW = ANCHOR_NORTH_WEST
	ANCHOR_NE = ANCHOR_NORTH_EAST
	ANCHOR_S  = ANCHOR_SOUTH
	ANCHOR_SW = ANCHOR_SOUTH_WEST
	ANCHOR_SE = ANCHOR_SOUTH_EAST
	ANCHOR_W  = ANCHOR_WEST
	ANCHOR_E  = ANCHOR_EAST
)
View Source 
const (
	SignalAllocation        cdk.Signal = "allocation"
	SignalCancelEvent       cdk.Signal = "cancel-event"
	SignalCdkEvent          cdk.Signal = "cdk-event"
	SignalDraw              cdk.Signal = "draw"
	SignalError             cdk.Signal = "error"
	SignalEventKey          cdk.Signal = "key-event"
	SignalEventMouse        cdk.Signal = "mouse-event"
	SignalGainedEventFocus  cdk.Signal = "gained-event-focus"
	SignalGainedFocus       cdk.Signal = "gained-focus"
	SignalGrabEventFocus    cdk.Signal = "grab-event-focus"
	SignalHomogeneous       cdk.Signal = "homogeneous"
	SignalInvalidate        cdk.Signal = "invalidate"
	SignalLostEventFocus    cdk.Signal = "lost-event-focus"
	SignalLostFocus         cdk.Signal = "lost-focus"
	SignalName              cdk.Signal = "name"
	SignalOrigin            cdk.Signal = "origin"
	SignalPackEnd           cdk.Signal = "pack-end"
	SignalPackStart         cdk.Signal = "pack-start"
	SignalReleaseEventFocus cdk.Signal = "set-event-focus"
	SignalReorderChild      cdk.Signal = "reorder-child"
	SignalReparent          cdk.Signal = "reparent"
	SignalResize            cdk.Signal = "resize"
	SignalSetEventFocus     cdk.Signal = "set-event-focus"
	SignalSetFlags          cdk.Signal = "set-flags"
	SignalSetParent         cdk.Signal = "set-parent"
	SignalSetSensitive      cdk.Signal = "set-sensitive"
	SignalSetSizeRequest    cdk.Signal = "set-size-request"
	SignalSetState          cdk.Signal = "set-state"
	SignalSetTheme          cdk.Signal = "set-theme"
	SignalSetThemeRequest   cdk.Signal = "set-theme-request"
	SignalSetWindow         cdk.Signal = "set-window"
	SignalShowAll           cdk.Signal = "show-all"
	SignalSpacing           cdk.Signal = "spacing"
	SignalTextDirection     cdk.Signal = "text-direction"
	SignalUnparent          cdk.Signal = "unparent"
	SignalUnsetFlags        cdk.Signal = "unset-flags"
	SignalUnsetState        cdk.Signal = "unset-state"
)
View Source 
const PropertyAboveChild cdk.Property = "above-child"

Whether the event-trapping window of the eventbox is above the window of the child widget as opposed to below it. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyAcceptFocus cdk.Property = "accept-focus"

Whether the window should receive the input focus. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyAdjustment cdk.Property = "adjustment"

The Adjustment that contains the current value of this range object. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyAppPaintable cdk.Property = "app-paintable"

Whether the application will paint directly on the widget. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyArrowShadowType cdk.Property = "shadow-type"

Appearance of the shadow surrounding the arrow. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SHADOW_OUT

View Source 
const PropertyArrowType cdk.Property = "arrow-type"

The direction the arrow should point. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_ARROW_RIGHT

View Source 
const PropertyAttributes cdk.Property = "attributes"

A list of style attributes to apply to the text of the label. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyBackgroundColor cdk.Property = "background-color"
View Source 
const PropertyBackgroundFillContent cdk.Property = "background-fill-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBlink cdk.Property = "blink"
View Source 
const PropertyBold cdk.Property = "bold"
View Source 
const PropertyBorder cdk.Property = "border"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderBackgroundColor cdk.Property = "border-background-color"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderBottomContent cdk.Property = "border-bottom-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderBottomLeftContent cdk.Property = "border-bottom-left-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderBottomRightContent cdk.Property = "border-bottom-right-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderColor cdk.Property = "border-color"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderLeftContent cdk.Property = "border-left-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderRightContent cdk.Property = "border-right-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderTopContent cdk.Property = "border-top-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderTopLeftContent cdk.Property = "border-top-left-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderTopRightContent cdk.Property = "border-top-right-content"
View Source 
const PropertyBorderWidth cdk.Property = "border-width"

The width of the empty border outside the containers children. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: <= 65535 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyBottomPadding cdk.Property = "bottom-padding"

The padding to insert at the bottom of the widget. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: <= G_MAXINT Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyBoxChildExpand cdk.Property = "box-child--expand"
View Source 
const PropertyBoxChildFill cdk.Property = "box-child--fill"
View Source 
const PropertyBoxChildPackType cdk.Property = "box-child--pack-type"
View Source 
const PropertyBoxChildPadding cdk.Property = "box-child--padding"
View Source 
const PropertyButtonLabel cdk.Property = "label"

Text of the label widget inside the button, if the button contains a label widget. Flags: Read / Write / Construct Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyCanDefault cdk.Property = "can-default"

Whether the widget can be the default widget. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyCanFocus cdk.Property = "can-focus"

Whether the widget can accept the input focus. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyChild cdk.Property = "child"

Can be used to add a new child to the container. Flags: Write

View Source 
const PropertyClass cdk.Property = "class"

grouping label

View Source 
const PropertyColor cdk.Property = "color"
View Source 
const PropertyCompositeChild cdk.Property = "composite-child"

Whether the widget is part of a composite widget. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyCursorPosition cdk.Property = "cursor-position"

The current position of the insertion cursor in chars. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyDebug cdk.Property = cdk.PropertyDebug

convenience wrapper for cdk.PropertyDebug

View Source 
const PropertyDebugChildren cdk.Property = "debug-children"
View Source 
const PropertyDecorated cdk.Property = "decorated"

Whether the window should be decorated by the window manager. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyDefaultHeight cdk.Property = "default-height"

The default height of the window, used when initially showing the window. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyDefaultWidth cdk.Property = "default-width"

The default width of the window, used when initially showing the window. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyDeletable cdk.Property = "deletable"

Whether the window frame should have a close button. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyDestroyWithParent cdk.Property = "destroy-with-parent"

If this window should be destroyed when the parent is destroyed. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyDim cdk.Property = "dim"
View Source 
const PropertyDoubleBuffered cdk.Property = "double-buffered"

Whether or not the widget is double buffered. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyEllipsize cdk.Property = "ellipsize"

The preferred place to ellipsize the string, if the label does not have enough room to display the entire string, specified as a bool. Flags: Read / Write Default value: false

View Source 
const PropertyEvents cdk.Property = "events"

The event mask that decides what kind of Events this widget gets. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK

View Source 
const PropertyExtensionEvents cdk.Property = "extension-events"

The mask that decides what kind of extension events this widget gets. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GDK_EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE

View Source 
const PropertyFillLevel cdk.Property = "fill-level"

The fill level (e.g. prebuffering of a network stream). See SetFillLevel. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 1.79769e+308

View Source 
const PropertyFocusOnClick cdk.Property = "focus-on-click"

Whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyFocusOnMap cdk.Property = "focus-on-map"

Whether the window should receive the input focus when mapped. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyGravity cdk.Property = "gravity"

The window gravity of the window. See Move and Gravity for more details about window gravity. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST

View Source 
const PropertyHAdjustment cdk.Property = "h-adjustment"

The Adjustment for the horizontal position. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyHScrollbarPolicy cdk.Property = "h-scrollbar-policy"

When the horizontal scrollbar is displayed. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS

View Source 
const PropertyHandler cdk.Property = "handler"
View Source 
const PropertyHasDefault cdk.Property = "has-default"

Whether the widget is the default widget. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyHasFocus cdk.Property = "has-focus"

Whether the widget has the input focus. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyHasTooltip cdk.Property = "has-tooltip"

Enables or disables the emission of “query-tooltip” on widget . A value of TRUE indicates that widget can have a tooltip, in this case the widget will be queried using “query-tooltip” to determine whether it will provide a tooltip or not. Note that setting this property to TRUE for the first time will change the event masks of the Windows of this widget to include leave-notify and motion-notify events. This cannot and will not be undone when the property is set to FALSE again. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyHasToplevelFocus cdk.Property = "has-toplevel-focus"

Whether the input focus is within this Window. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyHeight cdk.Property = "height"
View Source 
const PropertyHeightRequest cdk.Property = "height-request"

Override for height request of the widget, or -1 if natural request should be used. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyHomogeneous cdk.Property = "homogeneous"

Whether the children should all be the same size. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyID cdk.Property = "id"
View Source 
const PropertyIcon cdk.Property = "icon"

Icon for this window. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyIconName cdk.Property = "icon-name"

The :icon-name property specifies the name of the themed icon to use as the window icon. See IconTheme for more details. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyImage cdk.Property = "image"

Child widget to appear next to the button text. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyImagePosition cdk.Property = "image-position"

The position of the image relative to the text inside the button. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_POS_LEFT

View Source 
const PropertyInverted cdk.Property = "inverted"

Invert direction slider moves to increase range value. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyIsActive cdk.Property = "is-active"

Whether the toplevel is the current active window. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyIsFocus cdk.Property = "is-focus"

Whether the widget is the focus widget within the toplevel. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyIsLocked cdk.Property = "is-locked"

Is the accel group locked. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyItalic cdk.Property = "italic"
View Source 
const PropertyJustify cdk.Property = "justify"

The alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to each other. This does NOT affect the alignment of the label within its allocation. See Misc::xAlign for that. Flags: Read / Write Default value: cdk.JUSTIFY_LEFT

View Source 
const PropertyLabel cdk.Property = "label"

The text of the label. Flags: Read / Write Default value: ""

View Source 
const PropertyLabelUseUnderline cdk.Property = "use-underline"

If set, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyLabelWidget cdk.Property = "label-widget"

A widget to display in place of the usual frame label. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyLabelXAlign cdk.Property = "label-x-align"

The horizontal alignment of the label. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyLabelYAlign cdk.Property = "label-y-align"

The vertical alignment of the label. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 0.5

View Source 
const PropertyLayoutStyle cdk.Property = "layout-style"

How to lay out the buttons in the box. Possible values are: default, spread, edge, start and end. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE

View Source 
const PropertyLeftPadding cdk.Property = "left-padding"

The padding to insert at the left of the widget. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: <= G_MAXINT Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyLower cdk.Property = "lower"

The minimum value of the adjustment. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyLowerStepperSensitivity cdk.Property = "lower-stepper-sensitivity"

The sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the adjustment's lower side. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO

View Source 
const PropertyMaxWidthChars cdk.Property = "max-width-chars"

The desired maximum width of the label, in characters. If this property is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically, otherwise the label will request space for no more than the requested number of characters. If the “width-chars” property is set to a positive value, then the "max-width-chars" property is ignored. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyMnemonicKeyVal cdk.Property = "mnemonic-key-val"

The mnemonic accelerator key for this label. Flags: Read Default value: 16777215

View Source 
const PropertyMnemonicWidget cdk.Property = "mnemonic-widget"

The widget to be activated when the label's mnemonic key is pressed. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyMnemonicsVisible cdk.Property = "mnemonics-visible"

Whether mnemonics are currently visible in this window. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyModal cdk.Property = "modal"

If TRUE, the window is modal (other windows are not usable while this one is up). Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyModifierMask cdk.Property = "modifier-mask"

Modifier Mask. Flags: Read Default value: GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK | GDK_SUPER_MASK | GDK_HYPER_MASK | GDK_META_MASK

View Source 
const PropertyName cdk.Property = "name"

The name of the widget. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyNoShowAll cdk.Property = "no-show-all"

Whether ShowAll should not affect this widget. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyOpacity cdk.Property = "opacity"

The requested opacity of the window. See SetOpacity for more details about window opacity. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 1

View Source 
const PropertyOrientation cdk.Property = "orientation"

The orientation of the orientable. Flags: Read / Write Default value: ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL

View Source 
const PropertyPageIncrement cdk.Property = "page-increment"

The page increment of the adjustment. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyPageSize cdk.Property = "page-size"

The page size of the adjustment. Note that the page-size is irrelevant and should be set to zero if the adjustment is used for a simple scalar value, e.g. in a SpinButton. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyParent cdk.Property = "parent"

The parent widget of this widget. Must be a Container widget. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyReceivesDefault cdk.Property = "receives-default"

If TRUE, the widget will receive the default action when it is focused. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyRelatedAction cdk.Property = "related-action"

The action that this activatable will activate and receive updates from for various states and possibly appearance. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyRelief cdk.Property = "relief"

The border relief style. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_RELIEF_NORMAL

View Source 
const PropertyResizable cdk.Property = "resizable"

If TRUE, users can resize the window. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyResizeMode cdk.Property = "resize-mode"

Specify how resize events are handled. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_RESIZE_PARENT

View Source 
const PropertyRestrictToFillLevel cdk.Property = "restrict-to-fill-level"

The restrict-to-fill-level property controls whether slider movement is restricted to an upper boundary set by the fill level. See SetRestrictToFillLevel. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyReverse cdk.Property = "reverse"
View Source 
const PropertyRightPadding cdk.Property = "right-padding"

The padding to insert at the right of the widget. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: <= G_MAXINT Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyRole cdk.Property = "role"

Unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyRoundDigits cdk.Property = "round-digits"

The number of digits to round the value to when it changes, or -1. See “change-value”. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyScreen cdk.Property = "screen"

The screen where this window will be displayed. Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertyScrolledViewportShadowType cdk.Property = "viewport-shadow-type"

Style of bevel around the contents. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SHADOW_NONE

View Source 
const PropertySelectable cdk.Property = "selectable"

Whether the label text can be selected with the mouse. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertySelectionBound cdk.Property = "selection-bound"

The position of the opposite end of the selection from the cursor in chars. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertySensitive cdk.Property = "sensitive"

Whether the widget responds to input. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyShadow cdk.Property = "shadow"

Deprecated property, use shadow_type instead. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SHADOW_ETCHED_IN

View Source 
const PropertyShadowType cdk.Property = "shadow-type"

Appearance of the frame border. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SHADOW_ETCHED_IN

View Source 
const PropertyShowFillLevel cdk.Property = "show-fill-level"

The show-fill-level property controls whether fill level indicator graphics are displayed on the trough. See SetShowFillLevel. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertySingleLineMode cdk.Property = "single-line-mode"

Whether the label is in single line mode. In single line mode, the height of the label does not depend on the actual text, it is always set to ascent + descent of the font. This can be an advantage in situations where resizing the label because of text changes would be distracting, e.g. in a statusbar. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertySkipPagerHint cdk.Property = "skip-pager-hint"

TRUE if the window should not be in the pager. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertySkipTaskbarHint cdk.Property = "skip-taskbar-hint"

TRUE if the window should not be in the task bar. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertySpacing cdk.Property = "spacing"

The amount of space between children. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyStartupId cdk.Property = "startup-id"

The :startup-id is a write-only property for setting window's startup notification identifier. See SetStartupId for more details. Flags: Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyStepIncrement cdk.Property = "step-increment"

The step increment of the adjustment. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyStrike cdk.Property = "strike"
View Source 
const PropertyStyle cdk.Property = "style"

The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors etc). Flags: Read / Write

View Source 
const PropertySwapped cdk.Property = "swapped"
View Source 
const PropertyTitle cdk.Property = "title"

The title of the window. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyTooltipMarkup cdk.Property = "tooltip-markup"

Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up with the Tango text markup language. Also see TooltipSetMarkup. This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the tooltip shown if the given string is not NULL: “has-tooltip” will automatically be set to TRUE and there will be taken care of “query-tooltip” in the default signal handler. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyTooltipText cdk.Property = "tooltip-text"

Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string. Also see TooltipSetText. This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the tooltip shown if the given string is not NULL: “has-tooltip” will automatically be set to TRUE and there will be taken care of “query-tooltip” in the default signal handler. Flags: Read / Write Default value: NULL

View Source 
const PropertyTopPadding cdk.Property = "top-padding"

The padding to insert at the top of the widget. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: <= G_MAXINT Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyTrackVisitedLinks cdk.Property = "track-visited-links"

Set this property to TRUE to make the label track which links have been clicked. It will then apply the ::visited-link-color color, instead of ::link-color. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyTransientFor cdk.Property = "transient-for"

The transient parent of the window. See SetTransientFor for more details about transient windows. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyType cdk.Property = "type"

The type of the window. Flags: Read / Write / Construct Only Default value: GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL

View Source 
const PropertyTypeHint cdk.Property = "type-hint"

Hint to help the desktop environment understand what kind of window this is and how to treat it. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GDK_WINDOW_TYPE_HINT_NORMAL

View Source 
const PropertyUnderline cdk.Property = "underline"
View Source 
const PropertyUpdatePolicy cdk.Property = "update-policy"

How the range should be updated on the screen. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS

View Source 
const PropertyUpper cdk.Property = "upper"

The maximum value of the adjustment. Note that values will be restricted by upper - page-size if the page-size property is nonzero. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyUpperStepperSensitivity cdk.Property = "upper-stepper-sensitivity"

The sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the adjustment's upper side. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO

View Source 
const PropertyUrgencyHint cdk.Property = "urgency-hint"

TRUE if the window should be brought to the user's attention. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyUseActionAppearance cdk.Property = "use-action-appearance"

Whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance. See the Action documentation directly to find which properties should be ignored by the Activatable when this property is FALSE. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyUseMarkup cdk.Property = "use-markup"

The text of the label includes XML markup. See pango_parse_markup. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyUseStock cdk.Property = "use-stock"

If set, the label is used to pick a stock item instead of being displayed. Flags: Read / Write / Construct Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyUseUnderline cdk.Property = "use-underline"

If set, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key. Flags: Read / Write / Construct Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyVAdjustment cdk.Property = "v-adjustment"

The Adjustment for the vertical position. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyVScrollbarPolicy cdk.Property = "vscrollbar-policy"

When the vertical scrollbar is displayed. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS

View Source 
const PropertyValue cdk.Property = "value"

The value of the adjustment. Flags: Read / Write Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyViewportHAdjustment cdk.Property = "hadjustment"

The Adjustment that determines the values of the horizontal position for this viewport. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyViewportShadowType cdk.Property = "shadow-type"

Determines how the shadowed box around the viewport is drawn. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_SHADOW_IN

View Source 
const PropertyViewportVAdjustment cdk.Property = "vadjustment"

The Adjustment that determines the values of the vertical position for this viewport. Flags: Read / Write / Construct

View Source 
const PropertyVisible cdk.Property = "visible"

Whether the widget is visible. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyVisibleWindow cdk.Property = "visible-window"

Whether the event box is visible, as opposed to invisible and only used to trap events. Flags: Read / Write Default value: TRUE

View Source 
const PropertyWidth cdk.Property = "width"

css properties

View Source 
const PropertyWidthChars cdk.Property = "width-chars"

The desired width of the label, in characters. If this property is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically, otherwise the label will request either 3 characters or the property value, whichever is greater. If the "width-chars" property is set to a positive value, then the “max-width-chars” property is ignored. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyWidthRequest cdk.Property = "width-request"

Override for width request of the widget, or -1 if natural request should be used. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= -1 Default value: -1

View Source 
const PropertyWindow cdk.Property = "window"

The widget's window if it is realized, NULL otherwise. Flags: Read

View Source 
const PropertyWindowPlacement cdk.Property = "window-placement"

Where the contents are located with respect to the scrollbars. This property only takes effect if "window-placement-set" is TRUE. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT

View Source 
const PropertyWindowPlacementSet cdk.Property = "window-placement-set"

Whether "window-placement" should be used to determine the location of the contents with respect to the scrollbars. Otherwise, the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" setting is used. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyWindowPosition cdk.Property = "window-position"

The initial position of the window. Flags: Read / Write Default value: GTK_WIN_POS_NONE

View Source 
const PropertyWrap cdk.Property = "wrap"

If set, wrap lines if the text becomes too wide. Flags: Read / Write Default value: FALSE

View Source 
const PropertyWrapMode cdk.Property = "wrap-mode"

If line wrapping is on (see the “wrap” property) this controls how the line wrapping is done. The default is PANGO_WRAP_WORD, which means wrap on word boundaries. Flags: Read / Write Default value: PANGO_WRAP_WORD

View Source 
const PropertyXAlign cdk.Property = "x-align"

Horizontal position of child in available space. 0.0 is left aligned, 1.0 is right aligned. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 0.5

View Source 
const PropertyXPad cdk.Property = "x-pad"

The amount of space to add on the left and right of the widget, in pixels. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyXScale cdk.Property = "x-scale"

If available horizontal space is bigger than needed for the child, how much of it to use for the child. 0.0 means none, 1.0 means all. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 1

View Source 
const PropertyYAlign cdk.Property = "y-align"

Vertical position of child in available space. 0.0 is top aligned, 1.0 is bottom aligned. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 0.5

View Source 
const PropertyYPad cdk.Property = "y-pad"

The amount of space to add on the top and bottom of the widget, in pixels. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

View Source 
const PropertyYScale cdk.Property = "y-scale"

If available vertical space is bigger than needed for the child, how much of it to use for the child. 0.0 means none, 1.0 means all. Flags: Read / Write Allowed values: [0,1] Default value: 1

View Source 
const SignalAccelActivate cdk.Signal = "accel-activate"

The accel-activate signal is an implementation detail of AccelGroup and not meant to be used by applications.

View Source 
const SignalAccelChanged cdk.Signal = "accel-changed"

The accel-changed signal is emitted when a AccelGroupEntry is added to or removed from the accel group. Widgets like AccelLabel which display an associated accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild their visual representation if the accel_closure is theirs. Listener function arguments: 

keyval int	the accelerator keyval
modifier cdk.ModMask	the modifier combination of the accelerator
accelClosure GClosure	the GClosure of the accelerator
View Source 
const SignalAccelClosuresChanged cdk.Signal = "accel-closures-changed"
View Source 
const SignalActivate cdk.Signal = "activate"
View Source 
const SignalActivateCurrentLink cdk.Signal = "activate-current-link"

A keybinding signal which gets emitted when the user activates a link in the label. Applications may also emit the signal with g_signal_emit_by_name if they need to control activation of URIs programmatically. The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.

View Source 
const SignalActivateDefault cdk.Signal = "activate-default"

The ::activate-default signal is a which gets emitted when the user activates the default widget of window .

View Source 
const SignalActivateFocus cdk.Signal = "activate-focus"

The ::activate-focus signal is a which gets emitted when the user activates the currently focused widget of window .

View Source 
const SignalActivateLink cdk.Signal = "activate-link"

The signal which gets emitted to activate a URI. Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour, which is to call ShowUri.

View Source 
const SignalAdd cdk.Signal = "add"

Listener function arguments: 

widget Widget
View Source 
const SignalAdjustBounds cdk.Signal = "adjust-bounds"

Listener function arguments: 

arg1 float64
View Source 
const SignalButtonPressEvent cdk.Signal = "button-press-event"

The ::button-press-event signal will be emitted when a button (typically from a mouse) is pressed. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalButtonReleaseEvent cdk.Signal = "button-release-event"

The ::button-release-event signal will be emitted when a button (typically from a mouse) is released. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalCanActivateAccel cdk.Signal = "can-activate-accel"

Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal identified by signal_id can currently be activated. This signal is present to allow applications and derived widgets to override the default Widget handling for determining whether an accelerator can be activated.

View Source 
const SignalChangeValue cdk.Signal = "change-value"

The ::change-value signal is emitted when a scroll action is performed on a range. It allows an application to determine the type of scroll event that occurred and the resultant new value. The application can handle the event itself and return TRUE to prevent further processing. Or, by returning FALSE, it can pass the event to other handlers until the default CTK handler is reached. The value parameter is unrounded. An application that overrides the ::change-value signal is responsible for clamping the value to the desired number of decimal digits; the default CTK handler clamps the value based on “round_digits”. It is not possible to use delayed update policies in an overridden ::change-value handler.

View Source 
const SignalChanged cdk.Signal = "changed"
View Source 
const SignalCheckResize cdk.Signal = "check-resize"
View Source 
const SignalChildNotify cdk.Signal = "child-notify"

The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name. Listener function arguments: 

pspec GParamSpec        the GParamSpec of the changed child property
View Source 
const SignalClicked cdk.Signal = "clicked"

Emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).

View Source 
const SignalClientEvent cdk.Signal = "client-event"

The ::client-event will be emitted when the widget 's window receives a message (via a ClientMessage event) from another application.

View Source 
const SignalClose cdk.Signal = "close"

The ::close signal is a which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the dialog. The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.

View Source 
const SignalCompositedChanged cdk.Signal = "composited-changed"

The ::composited-changed signal is emitted when the composited status of widget s screen changes. See ScreenIsComposited.

View Source 
const SignalConfigureEvent cdk.Signal = "configure-event"

The ::configure-event signal will be emitted when the size, position or stacking of the widget 's window has changed. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask automatically for all new windows.

View Source 
const SignalCopyClipboard cdk.Signal = "copy-clipboard"

The ::copy-clipboard signal is a which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard. The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-c.

View Source 
const SignalDamageEvent cdk.Signal = "damage-event"

Emitted when a redirected window belonging to widget gets drawn into. The region/area members of the event shows what area of the redirected drawable was drawn into.

View Source 
const SignalDeleteEvent cdk.Signal = "delete-event"

The ::delete-event signal is emitted if a user requests that a toplevel window is closed. The default handler for this signal destroys the window. Connecting HideOnDelete to this signal will cause the window to be hidden instead, so that it can later be shown again without reconstructing it.

View Source 
const SignalDestroyEvent cdk.Signal = "destroy-event"

The ::destroy-event signal is emitted when a Window is destroyed. You rarely get this signal, because most widgets disconnect themselves from their window before they destroy it, so no widget owns the window at destroy time. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask automatically for all new windows.

View Source 
const SignalDirectionChanged cdk.Signal = "direction-changed"

The ::direction-changed signal is emitted when the text direction of a widget changes. Listener function arguments: 

previousDirection TextDirection the previous text direction of widget
View Source 
const SignalDragBegin cdk.Signal = "drag-begin"

The ::drag-begin signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is started. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to set up a custom drag icon with DragSourceSetIcon. Note that some widgets set up a drag icon in the default handler of this signal, so you may have to use g_signal_connect_after to override what the default handler did. Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
View Source 
const SignalDragDataDelete cdk.Signal = "drag-data-delete"

The ::drag-data-delete signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag with the action GDK_ACTION_MOVE is successfully completed. The signal handler is responsible for deleting the data that has been dropped. What "delete" means depends on the context of the drag operation. Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
View Source 
const SignalDragDataGet cdk.Signal = "drag-data-get"

The ::drag-data-get signal is emitted on the drag source when the drop site requests the data which is dragged. It is the responsibility of the signal handler to fill data with the data in the format which is indicated by info . See SelectionDataSet and SelectionDataSetText. Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
data SelectionData      the GtkSelectionData to be filled with the dragged data
info int        the info that has been registered with the target in the GtkTargetList
time int        the timestamp at which the data was requested
View Source 
const SignalDragDataReceived cdk.Signal = "drag-data-received"

The ::drag-data-received signal is emitted on the drop site when the dragged data has been received. If the data was received in order to determine whether the drop will be accepted, the handler is expected to call DragStatus and not finish the drag. If the data was received in response to a “drag-drop” signal (and this is the last target to be received), the handler for this signal is expected to process the received data and then call DragFinish, setting the success parameter depending on whether the data was processed successfully. The handler may inspect and modify drag_context->action before calling DragFinish, e.g. to implement GDK_ACTION_ASK as shown in the following example: Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
x int   where the drop happened
y int   where the drop happened
data SelectionData      the received data
info int        the info that has been registered with the target in the GtkTargetList
time int        the timestamp at which the data was received
View Source 
const SignalDragDrop cdk.Signal = "drag-drop"

The ::drag-drop signal is emitted on the drop site when the user drops the data onto the widget. The signal handler must determine whether the cursor position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns FALSE and no further processing is necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns TRUE. In this case, the handler must ensure that DragFinish is called to let the source know that the drop is done. The call to DragFinish can be done either directly or in a “drag-data-received” handler which gets triggered by calling DragGetData to receive the data for one or more of the supported targets.

View Source 
const SignalDragEnd cdk.Signal = "drag-end"

The ::drag-end signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is finished. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo things done in “drag-begin”. Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
View Source 
const SignalDragFailed cdk.Signal = "drag-failed"

The ::drag-failed signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag has failed. The signal handler may hook custom code to handle a failed DND operation based on the type of error, it returns TRUE is the failure has been already handled (not showing the default "drag operation failed" animation), otherwise it returns FALSE.

View Source 
const SignalDragLeave cdk.Signal = "drag-leave"

The ::drag-leave signal is emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves the widget. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo things done in “drag-motion”, e.g. undo highlighting with DragUnhighlight Listener function arguments: 

dragContext DragContext the drag context
time int        the timestamp of the motion event
View Source 
const SignalDragMotion cdk.Signal = "drag-motion"

The drag-motion signal is emitted on the drop site when the user moves the cursor over the widget during a drag. The signal handler must determine whether the cursor position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop zone, it returns FALSE and no further processing is necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns TRUE. In this case, the handler is responsible for providing the necessary information for displaying feedback to the user, by calling DragStatus. If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected can't be made based solely on the cursor position and the type of the data, the handler may inspect the dragged data by calling DragGetData and defer the DragStatus call to the “drag-data-received” handler. Note that you cannot not pass GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP, GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION or GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL to DragDestSet when using the drag-motion signal that way. Also note that there is no drag-enter signal. The drag receiver has to keep track of whether he has received any drag-motion signals since the last “drag-leave” and if not, treat the drag-motion signal as an "enter" signal. Upon an "enter", the handler will typically highlight the drop site with DragHighlight.

View Source 
const SignalEnter cdk.Signal = "enter"

Emitted when the pointer enters the button.

View Source 
const SignalEnterNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "enter-notify-event"

The ::enter-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer enters the widget 's window. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalEvent cdk.Signal = "event"

The CTK main loop will emit three signals for each GDK event delivered to a widget: one generic ::event signal, another, more specific, signal that matches the type of event delivered (e.g. “key-press-event”) and finally a generic “event-after” signal.

View Source 
const SignalEventAfter cdk.Signal = "event-after"

After the emission of the “event” signal and (optionally) the second more specific signal, ::event-after will be emitted regardless of the previous two signals handlers return values. Listener function arguments: 

event Event     the GdkEvent which triggered this signal
View Source 
const SignalExposeEvent cdk.Signal = "expose-event"

The ::expose-event signal is emitted when an area of a previously obscured Window is made visible and needs to be redrawn. GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets will get a synthesized event from their parent widget. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK mask. Note that the ::expose-event signal has been replaced by a ::draw signal in CTK 3. The CTK 3 migration guide for hints on how to port from ::expose-event to ::draw.

View Source 
const SignalFocus cdk.Signal = "focus"
View Source 
const SignalFocusInEvent cdk.Signal = "focus-in-event"

The ::focus-in-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus enters the widget 's window. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.

View Source 
const SignalFocusOutEvent cdk.Signal = "focus-out-event"

The ::focus-out-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the widget 's window. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.

View Source 
const SignalFrameEvent cdk.Signal = "frame-event"
View Source 
const SignalGrabBrokenEvent cdk.Signal = "grab-broken-event"

Emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab on a window belonging to widget gets broken. On X11, this happens when the grab window becomes unviewable (i.e. it or one of its ancestors is unmapped), or if the same application grabs the pointer or keyboard again.

View Source 
const SignalGrabFocus cdk.Signal = "grab-focus"
View Source 
const SignalGrabNotify cdk.Signal = "grab-notify"

The ::grab-notify signal is emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a CTK grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed. A widget is shadowed by a GrabAdd when the topmost grab widget in the grab stack of its window group is not its ancestor. Listener function arguments: 

wasGrabbed bool FALSE if the widget becomes shadowed, TRUE if it becomes unshadowed
View Source 
const SignalHide cdk.Signal = "hide"
View Source 
const SignalHierarchyChanged cdk.Signal = "hierarchy-changed"

The ::hierarchy-changed signal is emitted when the anchored state of a widget changes. A widget is anchored when its toplevel ancestor is a Window. This signal is emitted when a widget changes from un-anchored to anchored or vice-versa.

View Source 
const SignalKeyPressEvent cdk.Signal = "key-press-event"

The ::key-press-event signal is emitted when a key is pressed. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalKeyReleaseEvent cdk.Signal = "key-release-event"

The ::key-release-event signal is emitted when a key is pressed. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalKeynavFailed cdk.Signal = "keynav-failed"

Gets emitted if keyboard navigation fails. See KeynavFailed for details.

View Source 
const SignalKeysChanged cdk.Signal = "keys-changed"

The ::keys-changed signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators or mnemonics that are associated with window changes.

View Source 
const SignalLeave cdk.Signal = "leave"

Emitted when the pointer leaves the button.

View Source 
const SignalLeaveNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "leave-notify-event"

The ::leave-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer leaves the widget 's window. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalMap cdk.Signal = "map"
View Source 
const SignalMapEvent cdk.Signal = "map-event"

The ::map-event signal will be emitted when the widget 's window is mapped. A window is mapped when it becomes visible on the screen. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask automatically for all new windows.

View Source 
const SignalMnemonicActivate cdk.Signal = "mnemonic-activate"
View Source 
const SignalMotionNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "motion-notify-event"

The ::motion-notify-event signal is emitted when the pointer moves over the widget's Window. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalMoveCursor cdk.Signal = "move-cursor"

The ::move-cursor signal is a which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement. If the cursor is not visible in entry , this signal causes the viewport to be moved instead. Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with g_signal_emit_by_name if they need to control the cursor programmatically. The default bindings for this signal come in two variants, the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection, the variant without the Shift modifer does not. There are too many key combinations to list them all here. Listener function arguments: 

step MovementStep	the granularity of the move, as a GtkMovementStep
count int	the number of step units to move
extendSelection bool	TRUE if the move should extend the selection
View Source 
const SignalMoveFocus cdk.Signal = "move-focus"

Listener function arguments: 

direction DirectionType
View Source 
const SignalMoveFocusOut cdk.Signal = "move-focus-out"

Listener function arguments: 

arg1 DirectionType
View Source 
const SignalMoveSlider cdk.Signal = "move-slider"

Virtual function that moves the slider. Used for keybindings. Listener function arguments: 

step ScrollType	how to move the slider
View Source 
const SignalNoExposeEvent cdk.Signal = "no-expose-event"

The ::no-expose-event will be emitted when the widget 's window is drawn as a copy of another Drawable (with DrawDrawable or WindowCopyArea) which was completely unobscured. If the source window was partially obscured EventExpose events will be generated for those areas.

View Source 
const SignalParentSet cdk.Signal = "parent-set"

The ::parent-set signal is emitted when a new parent has been set on a widget.

View Source 
const SignalPopulatePopup cdk.Signal = "populate-popup"

The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the context menu of the label. Note that only selectable labels have context menus. If you need to add items to the context menu, connect to this signal and append your menuitems to the menu . Listener function arguments: 

menu Menu	the menu that is being populated
View Source 
const SignalPopupMenu cdk.Signal = "popup-menu"

This signal gets emitted whenever a widget should pop up a context menu. This usually happens through the standard key binding mechanism; by pressing a certain key while a widget is focused, the user can cause the widget to pop up a menu. For example, the Entry widget creates a menu with clipboard commands. See the section called “Implement Widget::popup_menu” for an example of how to use this signal.

View Source 
const SignalPressed cdk.Signal = "pressed"

Emitted when the button is pressed.

View Source 
const SignalPropertyNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "property-notify-event"

The ::property-notify-event signal will be emitted when a property on the widget 's window has been changed or deleted. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK mask.

View Source 
const SignalProximityInEvent cdk.Signal = "proximity-in-event"

To receive this signal the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalProximityOutEvent cdk.Signal = "proximity-out-event"

To receive this signal the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalQueryTooltip cdk.Signal = "query-tooltip"

Emitted when “has-tooltip” is TRUE and the “gtk-tooltip-timeout” has expired with the cursor hovering "above" widget ; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode. Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine whether a tooltip should be shown for widget . If this is the case TRUE should be returned, FALSE otherwise. Note that if keyboard_mode is TRUE, the values of x and y are undefined and should not be used. The signal handler is free to manipulate tooltip with the therefore destined function calls.

View Source 
const SignalRangeValueChanged cdk.Signal = "value-changed"

Emitted when the range value changes.

View Source 
const SignalRealize cdk.Signal = "realize"
View Source 
const SignalReleased cdk.Signal = "released"

Emitted when the button is released.

View Source 
const SignalRemove cdk.Signal = "remove"

Listener function arguments: 

widget Widget
View Source 
const SignalResponse cdk.Signal = "response"

Emitted when an action widget is clicked, the dialog receives a delete event, or the application programmer calls Response. On a delete event, the response ID is GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Otherwise, it depends on which action widget was clicked. Listener function arguments: 

responseId int	the response ID
View Source 
const SignalScreenChanged cdk.Signal = "screen-changed"

The ::screen-changed signal gets emitted when the screen of a widget has changed. Listener function arguments: 

previousScreen Screen   the previous screen, or NULL if the widget was not associated with a screen before.
View Source 
const SignalScrollChild cdk.Signal = "scroll-child"

The ::scroll-child signal is a which gets emitted when a keybinding that scrolls is pressed. The horizontal or vertical adjustment is updated which triggers a signal that the scrolled windows child may listen to and scroll itself.

View Source 
const SignalScrollEvent cdk.Signal = "scroll-event"

The ::scroll-event signal is emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is pressed. Wheel mice are usually configured to generate button press events for buttons 4 and 5 when the wheel is turned. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK mask. This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.

View Source 
const SignalSelectionClearEvent cdk.Signal = "selection-clear-event"

The ::selection-clear-event signal will be emitted when the the widget 's window has lost ownership of a selection.

View Source 
const SignalSelectionGet cdk.Signal = "selection-get"

Listener function arguments: 

data SelectionData
info int
time int
View Source 
const SignalSelectionNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "selection-notify-event"
View Source 
const SignalSelectionReceived cdk.Signal = "selection-received"

Listener function arguments: 

data SelectionData
time int
View Source 
const SignalSelectionRequestEvent cdk.Signal = "selection-request-event"

The ::selection-request-event signal will be emitted when another client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget 's window.

View Source 
const SignalSetFocus cdk.Signal = "set-focus"

Listener function arguments: 

widget Widget
View Source 
const SignalSetFocusChild cdk.Signal = "set-focus-child"

Listener function arguments: 

widget Widget
View Source 
const SignalSetScrollAdjustments cdk.Signal = "set-scroll-adjustments"

Set the scroll adjustments for the viewport. Usually scrolled containers like ScrolledWindow will emit this signal to connect two instances of Scrollbar to the scroll directions of the Viewport. Listener function arguments: 

vertical Adjustment	the vertical GtkAdjustment
arg2 Adjustment
View Source 
const SignalShow cdk.Signal = "show"
View Source 
const SignalShowHelp cdk.Signal = "show-help"
View Source 
const SignalSizeAllocate cdk.Signal = "size-allocate"

Listener function arguments: 

allocation Rectangle
View Source 
const SignalSizeRequest cdk.Signal = "size-request"

Listener function arguments: 

requisition Requisition
View Source 
const SignalStateChanged cdk.Signal = "state-changed"

The ::state-changed signal is emitted when the widget state changes. See GetState. Listener function arguments: 

state StateType the previous state
View Source 
const SignalStyleRealize cdk.Signal = "realize"

Emitted when the style has been initialized for a particular colormap and depth. Connecting to this signal is probably seldom useful since most of the time applications and widgets only deal with styles that have been already realized.

View Source 
const SignalStyleSet cdk.Signal = "style-set"

The ::style-set signal is emitted when a new style has been set on a widget. Note that style-modifying functions like ModifyBase also cause this signal to be emitted. Listener function arguments: 

previousStyle Style     the previous style, or NULL if the widget just got its initial style.
View Source 
const SignalStyleUnrealize cdk.Signal = "unrealize"

Emitted when the aspects of the style specific to a particular colormap and depth are being cleaned up. A connection to this signal can be useful if a widget wants to cache objects like a GC as object data on Style. This signal provides a convenient place to free such cached objects.

View Source 
const SignalUnmap cdk.Signal = "unmap"
View Source 
const SignalUnmapEvent cdk.Signal = "unmap-event"

The ::unmap-event signal will be emitted when the widget 's window is unmapped. A window is unmapped when it becomes invisible on the screen. To receive this signal, the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask automatically for all new windows.

View Source 
const SignalUnrealize cdk.Signal = "unrealize"
View Source 
const SignalValueChanged cdk.Signal = "value-changed"
View Source 
const SignalVisibilityNotifyEvent cdk.Signal = "visibility-notify-event"

The ::visibility-notify-event will be emitted when the widget 's window is obscured or unobscured. To receive this signal the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK mask.

View Source 
const SignalWindowStateEvent cdk.Signal = "window-state-event"

The ::window-state-event will be emitted when the state of the toplevel window associated to the widget changes. To receive this signal the Window associated to the widget needs to enable the GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask automatically for all new windows.

View Source 
const TypeAccelGroup cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-accel-group"

CDK type-tag for AccelGroup objects

View Source 
const TypeAdjustment cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-adjustment"

CDK type-tag for Adjustment objects

View Source 
const TypeAlignment cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-alignment"

CDK type-tag for Alignment objects

View Source 
const TypeArrow cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-arrow"

CDK type-tag for Arrow objects

View Source 
const TypeBin cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-bin"

CDK type-tag for Bin objects

View Source 
const TypeBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-box"

CDK type-tag for Box objects

View Source 
const TypeBuilder cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-builder"
View Source 
const TypeButton cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-button"

CDK type-tag for Button objects

View Source 
const TypeButtonBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-button-box"

CDK type-tag for ButtonBox objects

View Source 
const TypeContainer cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-container"

CDK type-tag for Container objects

View Source 
const TypeDialog cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-dialog"

CDK type-tag for Dialog objects

View Source 
const TypeEventBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-event-box"

CDK type-tag for EventBox objects

View Source 
const TypeFakeWindow cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-fake-window"
View Source 
const TypeFrame cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-frame"

CDK type-tag for Frame objects

View Source 
const (
	TypeHBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-h-box"
)
View Source 
const TypeHButtonBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-h-button-box"
View Source 
const (
	TypeHScrollbar cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-h-scrollbar"
)
View Source 
const TypeLabel cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-label"

CDK type-tag for Label objects

View Source 
const TypeMisc cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-misc"

CDK type-tag for Misc objects

View Source 
const TypeObject cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-object"

CDK type tag for CTK Objects

View Source 
const TypeRange cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-range"

CDK type-tag for Range objects

View Source 
const TypeScrollbar cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-scrollbar"

CDK type-tag for Scrollbar objects

View Source 
const (
	TypeScrolledViewport cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-scrolled-viewport"
)
View Source 
const TypeStyle cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-style"

CDK type-tag for Style objects

View Source 
const (
	TypeVBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-v-box"
)
View Source 
const TypeVButtonBox cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-v-button-box"
View Source 
const (
	TypeVScrollbar cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-v-scrollbar"
)
View Source 
const TypeViewport cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-viewport"

CDK type-tag for Viewport objects

View Source 
const TypeWidget cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-widget"

CDK type-tag for Widget objects

View Source 
const TypeWindow cdk.CTypeTag = "ctk-window"

CDK type-tag for Window objects

Variables

View Source 
var (
	DefaultMonoButtonTheme = cdk.Theme{
		Content: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle,
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
		Border: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle,
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
	}
	DefaultColorButtonTheme = cdk.Theme{
		Content: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorFireBrick).Dim(true).Bold(false),
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorDarkRed).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorDarkRed).Dim(false).Bold(true).Reverse(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
		Border: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorFireBrick).Dim(true).Bold(false),
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorDarkRed).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorDarkRed).Dim(false).Bold(true).Reverse(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
	}
)
View Source 
var (
	DefaultMonoScrollbarTheme = cdk.Theme{
		Content: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle,
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
		Border: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle,
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultMonoStyle.Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
	}
	DefaultColorScrollbarTheme = cdk.Theme{

		Content: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorDarkGray).Background(cdk.ColorSilver).Dim(true).Bold(false),
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorBlack).Background(cdk.ColorWhite).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorBlack).Background(cdk.ColorWhite).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},

		Border: cdk.ThemeAspect{
			Normal:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorBlack).Background(cdk.ColorGray).Dim(true).Bold(false),
			Focused:     cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorWhite).Background(cdk.ColorDarkGray).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			Active:      cdk.DefaultColorStyle.Foreground(cdk.ColorBlack).Background(cdk.ColorSilver).Dim(false).Bold(true),
			FillRune:    cdk.DefaultFillRune,
			BorderRunes: cdk.DefaultBorderRune,
			ArrowRunes:  cdk.DefaultArrowRune,
			Overlay:     false,
		},
	}
)
View Source 
var ErrFallthrough = fmt.Errorf("fallthrough")

Functions

func AddStockItems 

func AddStockItems(items ...*StockItem)

Registers each of the stock items in items. If an item already exists with the same stock ID as one of the items, the old item gets replaced.

func BuilderRegisterConstructor 

func BuilderRegisterConstructor(tag cdk.TypeTag, fn BuilderTranslationFn)

func TestingWithCtkWindow 

func TestingWithCtkWindow(d cdk.DisplayManager) error

func WithFakeWindow 

func WithFakeWindow(fn WithFakeWindowFn) func()

func WithFakeWindowOptions 

func WithFakeWindowOptions(w, h int, theme cdk.Theme, fn WithFakeWindowFn) func()

Types

type AccelFlags 

type AccelFlags uint64

Accel flags 

const (
	ACCEL_VISIBLE AccelFlags = 1 << 0
	ACCEL_LOCKED  AccelFlags = 1 << iota
	ACCEL_MASK    AccelFlags = 0
)

type AccelGroup 

type AccelGroup interface {
	Object

	Init() (already bool)
	AccelConnect(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask, accelFlags AccelFlags, closure GClosure) (id int)
	ConnectByPath(accelPath string, closure GClosure)
	AccelGroupActivate(acceleratable Object, keyval cdk.Key, modifier cdk.ModMask) (activated bool)
	AccelDisconnect(id int) (removed bool)
	DisconnectKey(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (removed bool)
	Query(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (entries []*AccelGroupEntry)
	Activate(accelQuark cdk.QuarkID, acceleratable Object, accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (value bool)
	Lock()
	Unlock()
	GetIsLocked() (locked bool)
	FromAccelClosure(closure GClosure) (value AccelGroup)
	GetModifierMask() (value cdk.ModMask)
	Find(findFunc AccelGroupFindFunc, data interface{}) (key *AccelKey)
	AcceleratorValid(keyval cdk.Key, modifiers cdk.ModMask) (valid bool)
	AcceleratorParse(accelerator string) (acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask)
	AcceleratorName(acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask) (value string)
	AcceleratorGetLabel(acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask) (value string)
	AcceleratorSetDefaultModMask(defaultModMask cdk.ModMask)
	AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask() (value int)
}

AccelGroup Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- AccelGroup

A AccelGroup represents a group of keyboard accelerators, typically attached to a toplevel Window (with WindowAddAccelGroup). Usually you won't need to create a AccelGroup directly; instead, when using ItemFactory, CTK automatically sets up the accelerators for your menus in the item factory's AccelGroup. Note that accelerators are different from mnemonics. Accelerators are shortcuts for activating a menu item; they appear alongside the menu item they're a shortcut for. For example "Ctrl+Q" might appear alongside the "Quit" menu item. Mnemonics are shortcuts for GUI elements such as text entries or buttons; they appear as underlined characters. See LabelNewWithMnemonic. Menu items can have both accelerators and mnemonics, of course.

type AccelGroupEntry 

type AccelGroupEntry struct {
	Accelerator AccelKey
	Closure     GClosure
	Quark       cdk.QuarkID
}

func NewAccelGroupEntry 

func NewAccelGroupEntry(key AccelKey, closure GClosure, quark cdk.QuarkID) (age *AccelGroupEntry)

type AccelGroupFindFunc 

type AccelGroupFindFunc = func(key AccelKey, closure GClosure, data []interface{}) bool

type AccelKey 

type AccelKey struct {
	Key   cdk.Key
	Mods  cdk.ModMask
	Flags AccelFlags
}

func MakeAccelKey 

func MakeAccelKey(key cdk.Key, mods cdk.ModMask, flags AccelFlags) (accelKey AccelKey)

func (AccelKey) String 

func (a AccelKey) String() (key string)

type Activatable 

type Activatable interface {

	// emit the Activate signal, use Clicked() to programmatically trigger
	// the activation of an Activatable Widget
	Activate() (value bool)
	// the Activatable Widget has been pressed and now released
	Clicked() cdk.EventFlag
	// set the related-action of a Widget?
	// can grab focus
	GrabFocus()
}

Activatable Hierarchy: 

CInterface
  +- Activatable

type Adjustment 

type Adjustment interface {
	Object

	Init() bool
	GetValue() (value int)
	SetValue(value int)
	ClampPage(upper, lower int)
	Changed() cdk.EventFlag
	ValueChanged() cdk.EventFlag
	Settings() (value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize int)
	Configure(value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize int)
	GetLower() (value int)
	SetLower(lower int)
	GetUpper() (upper int)
	SetUpper(upper int)
	GetStepIncrement() (stepIncrement int)
	SetStepIncrement(stepIncrement int)
	GetPageIncrement() (pageIncrement int)
	SetPageIncrement(pageIncrement int)
	GetPageSize() (pageSize int)
	SetPageSize(pageSize int)
	Moot() bool
	ShowByPolicy(policy PolicyType) bool
}

Adjustment Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Adjustment

The Adjustment CTK object is a means of managing the state of multiple widgets concurrently. By sharing the same Adjustment instance, one or more widgets can ensure that all related User Interface elements are reflecting the same values and constraints. The Adjustment consists of an integer value, with an upper and lower bounds, and pagination rendering features

type Alignable 

type Alignable interface {
	SetAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	GetAlignment() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
}

type Alignment 

type Alignment interface {
	Bin
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	Get() (xAlign, yAlign, xScale, yScale float64)
	Set(xAlign, yAlign, xScale, yScale float64)
	GetPadding() (paddingTop, paddingBottom, paddingLeft, paddingRight int)
	SetPadding(paddingTop, paddingBottom, paddingLeft, paddingRight int)
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Alignment Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Alignment

The Alignment widget controls the alignment and size of its child widget. It has four settings: xScale, yScale, xAlign, and yAlign. The scale settings are used to specify how much the child widget should expand to fill the space allocated to the Alignment. The values can range from 0 (meaning the child doesn't expand at all) to 1 (meaning the child expands to fill all of the available space). The align settings are used to place the child widget within the available area. The values range from 0 (top or left) to 1 (bottom or right). Of course, if the scale settings are both set to 1, the alignment settings have no effect.

type AnchorType 

type AnchorType uint64

Anchor type

type ArgFlags 

type ArgFlags uint64

Arg flags 

const (
	ARC_READABLE       ArgFlags = ArgFlags(PARAM_READABLE)
	ARC_WRITABLE       ArgFlags = ArgFlags(PARAM_WRITABLE)
	ARC_CONSTRUCT      ArgFlags = ArgFlags(PARAM_CONSTRUCT)
	ARC_CONSTRUCT_ONLY ArgFlags = ArgFlags(PARAM_CONSTRUCT_ONLY)
	ARC_CHILD_ARG      ArgFlags = 1 << 4
)

type Arrow 

type Arrow interface {
	Misc
	Buildable

	Init() bool
	SetArrowType(arrow ArrowType)
	GetArrowType() (arrow ArrowType)
	GetArrowRune() (r rune, width int)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Arrow Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Misc
      +- Arrow

Arrow should be used to draw simple arrows that need to point in one of the four cardinal directions (up, down, left, or right). The style of the arrow can be one of shadow in, shadow out, etched in, or etched out. Note that these directions and style types may be amended in versions of CTK to come. Arrow will fill any space allotted to it, but since it is inherited from Misc, it can be padded and/or aligned, to fill exactly the space the programmer desires. Arrows are created with a call to New. The direction or style of an arrow can be changed after creation by using Set.

type ArrowPlacement 

type ArrowPlacement uint64

Arrow placement 

const (
	ARROWS_BOTH ArrowPlacement = iota
	ARROWS_START
	ARROWS_END
)

type ArrowType 

type ArrowType uint64

Arrow type 

const (
	ArrowUp ArrowType = iota
	ArrowDown
	ArrowLeft
	ArrowRight
	ArrowNone
)

type AssistantPageType 

type AssistantPageType uint64

Assistant page type 

const (
	ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONTENT AssistantPageType = iota
	ASSISTANT_PAGE_INTRO
	ASSISTANT_PAGE_CONFIRM
	ASSISTANT_PAGE_SUMMARY
	ASSISTANT_PAGE_PROGRESS
)

type AttachOptions 

type AttachOptions uint64

Attach options 

const (
	EXPAND AttachOptions = 1 << 0
	SHRINK AttachOptions = 1 << iota
	FILL
)

type Bin 

type Bin interface {
	Container
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	GetChild() (value Widget)
	Add(w Widget)
}

Bin Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Window
        +- Alignment
        +- Frame
        +- Button
        +- Item
        +- ComboBox
        +- EventBox
        +- Expander
        +- HandleBox
        +- ToolItem
        +- ScrolledWindow
        +- Viewport

The Bin widget is a container with just one child. It is not very useful itself, but it is useful for deriving subclasses, since it provides common code needed for handling a single child widget. Many CTK widgets are subclasses of Bin, including Window, Button, Frame, HandleBox or ScrolledWindow.

type BitFlags 

type BitFlags interface {
	Get() CBitFlags
	Set(f CBitFlags) BitFlags
	Clear(f CBitFlags) BitFlags
	Toggle(f CBitFlags) BitFlags
	Has(f CBitFlags) bool
}

type Box 

type Box interface {
	Container
	Buildable
	Orientable

	Init() (already bool)
	PackStart(child Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)
	PackEnd(child Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)
	Remove(w Widget)
	GetOrientation() (orientation cdk.Orientation)
	SetOrientation(orientation cdk.Orientation)
	GetHomogeneous() (value bool)
	SetHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)
	GetSpacing() (value int)
	SetSpacing(spacing int)
	ReorderChild(child Widget, position int)
	QueryChildPacking(child Widget) (expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)
	SetChildPacking(child Widget, expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	ShowAll()
	Add(child Widget)
	GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Box Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Box
        +- ButtonBox
        +- VBox
        +- HBox

type Buildable 

type Buildable interface {
	ListProperties() (known []cdk.Property)
	InitWithProperties(properties map[cdk.Property]string) (already bool, err error)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	SetProperties(properties map[cdk.Property]string) (err error)
	SetPropertyFromString(property cdk.Property, value string) (err error)
	SetSensitive(sensitive bool)
	SetFlags(widgetFlags WidgetFlags)
	UnsetFlags(widgetFlags WidgetFlags)
	Connect(signal cdk.Signal, handle string, c cdk.SignalListenerFn, data ...interface{})
	LogErr(err error)
	Show()
	GrabFocus()
}

type Builder 

type Builder interface {
	cdk.Object

	Init() (already bool)
	BuildableTypeTags() map[string]cdk.TypeTag
	LookupNamedSignalHandler(name string) (fn cdk.SignalListenerFn)
	AddNamedSignalHandler(name string, fn cdk.SignalListenerFn)
	GetWidget(name string) (w interface{})
	GetWidgetsBuiltByType(tag cdk.CTypeTag) (widgets []interface{})
	ParsePacking(packing *CBuilderElement) (expand, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)
	LoadFromString(raw string) (topElement *CBuilderElement, err error)
	Build(element *CBuilderElement) (newObject interface{})
}

func NewBuilder 

func NewBuilder() (builder Builder)

type BuilderElement 

type BuilderElement interface {
	String() string
	ApplyProperties()
	ApplyProperty(k, v string) (set bool)
}

type BuilderError 

type BuilderError uint64

Builder error 

const (
	BUILDER_ERROR_INVALID_TYPE_FUNCTION BuilderError = iota
	BUILDER_ERROR_UNHANDLED_TAG
	BUILDER_ERROR_MISSINC_ATTRIBUTE
	BUILDER_ERROR_INVALID_ATTRIBUTE
	BUILDER_ERROR_INVALID_TAG
	BUILDER_ERROR_MISSINC_PROPERTY_VALUE
	BUILDER_ERROR_INVALID_VALUE
	BUILDER_ERROR_VERSION_MISMATCH
	BUILDER_ERROR_DUPLICATE_ID
)

type BuilderNode 

type BuilderNode struct {
	XMLName xml.Name
	Attrs   []xml.Attr    `xml:"-"`
	Content []byte        `xml:",innerxml"`
	Nodes   []BuilderNode `xml:",any"`
}

func (*BuilderNode) UnmarshalXML 

func (n *BuilderNode) UnmarshalXML(d *xml.Decoder, start xml.StartElement) error

type BuilderTranslationFn 

type BuilderTranslationFn = func(builder Builder, widget Widget, name, value string) error

type Button 

type Button interface {
	Bin
	Activatable
	Alignable
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	Activate() (value bool)
	Clicked() cdk.EventFlag
	SetRelief(newStyle ReliefStyle)
	GetRelief() (value ReliefStyle)
	GetLabel() (value string)
	SetLabel(label string)
	GetUseStock() (value bool)
	SetUseStock(useStock bool)
	GetUseUnderline() (value bool)
	SetUseUnderline(useUnderline bool)
	SetFocusOnClick(focusOnClick bool)
	GetFocusOnClick() (value bool)
	SetAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	GetAlignment() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	SetImage(image Widget)
	GetImage() (value Widget, ok bool)
	SetImagePosition(position PositionType)
	GetImagePosition() (value PositionType)
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	SetPressed(pressed bool)
	GetPressed() bool
	GrabFocus()
	GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)
	GetDefaultChildren() []Widget
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	CancelEvent()
	GrabEventFocus()
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Button Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Button
          +- ToggleButton
          +- ColorButton
          +- FontButton
          +- LinkButton
          +- OptionMenu
          +- ScaleButton

type ButtonAction 

type ButtonAction uint64

Button action 

const (
	BUTTON_IGNORED ButtonAction = 0
	BUTTON_SELECTS ButtonAction = 1 << 0
	BUTTON_DRAGS   ButtonAction = 1 << iota
	BUTTON_EXPANDS
)

type ButtonBox 

type ButtonBox interface {
	Box
	Buildable
	Orientable

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	GetLayout() (value ButtonBoxStyle)
	GetChildSecondary(w Widget) (isSecondary bool)
	GetChildPrimary(w Widget) (isPrimary bool)
	SetLayout(layoutStyle ButtonBoxStyle)
	SetChildSecondary(child Widget, isSecondary bool)
	Show()
	ShowAll()
	Hide()
	PackStart(w Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)
	PackEnd(w Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)
	SetChildPacking(child Widget, expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

ButtonBox Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Box
        +- ButtonBox
          +- HButtonBox
          +- VButtonBox

type ButtonBoxStyle 

type ButtonBoxStyle uint64

Button box style 

const (
	BUTTONBOX_DEFAULT_STYLE ButtonBoxStyle = iota
	// Spread the buttons evenly and centered away from the edges
	BUTTONBOX_SPREAD
	// Spread the buttons evenly and centered from edge to edge
	BUTTONBOX_EDGE
	// Group buttons at the start
	BUTTONBOX_START
	// Group buttons at the end
	BUTTONBOX_END
	// Group buttons at the center
	BUTTONBOX_CENTER
	// Buttons are expanded to evenly consume all space available
	BUTTONBOX_EXPAND
)

type ButtonsType 

type ButtonsType uint64

Buttons type 

const (
	BUTTONS_NONE ButtonsType = iota
	BUTTONS_OK
	BUTTONS_CLOSE
	BUTTONS_CANCEL
	BUTTONS_YES_NO
	BUTTONS_OK_CANCEL
)

type CAccelGroup 

type CAccelGroup struct {
	CObject
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CAccelGroup structure implements the AccelGroup interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with AccelGroup objects

func MakeAccelGroup 

func MakeAccelGroup() *CAccelGroup

Default constructor for AccelGroup objects

func NewAccelGroup 

func NewAccelGroup() (value *CAccelGroup)

Constructor for AccelGroup objects

func (*CAccelGroup) AccelConnect 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AccelConnect(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask, accelFlags AccelFlags, closure GClosure) (id int)

Installs an accelerator in this group. When accel_group is being activated in response to a call to AccelGroupsActivate, closure will be invoked if the accel_key and accel_mods from AccelGroupsActivate match those of this connection. The signature used for the closure is that of AccelGroupActivate. Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be connected to one accelerator group. Parameters: 

accelGroup	the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
accelKey	key value of the accelerator
accelMods	modifier combination of the accelerator
accelFlags	a flag mask to configure this accelerator
closure	closure to be executed upon accelerator activation

func (*CAccelGroup) AccelDisconnect 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AccelDisconnect(id int) (removed bool)

Removes an accelerator previously installed through Connect. Since 2.20 closure can be NULL. Parameters: 

accelGroup	the accelerator group to remove an accelerator from
closure	the closure to remove from this accelerator group, or NULL

to remove all closures. 

returns	TRUE if the closure was found and got disconnected

func (*CAccelGroup) AccelGroupActivate 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AccelGroupActivate(acceleratable Object, keyval cdk.Key, modifier cdk.ModMask) (activated bool)

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorGetDefaultModMask() (value int)

Gets the value set by AcceleratorSetDefaultModMask. Parameters: 

returns	the default accelerator modifier mask

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorGetLabel 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorGetLabel(acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask) (value string)

Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user. Parameters: 

acceleratorKey	accelerator keyval
acceleratorMods	accelerator modifier mask

Returns: 

a newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorName 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorName(acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask) (value string)

Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string parseable by AcceleratorParse. For example, if you pass in GDK_q and GDK_CONTROL_MASK, this function returns "<Control>q". If you need to display accelerators in the user interface, see AcceleratorGetLabel. Parameters: 

acceleratorKey	accelerator keyval
acceleratorMods	accelerator modifier mask

Returns: 

a newly-allocated accelerator name

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorParse 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorParse(accelerator string) (acceleratorKey cdk.Key, acceleratorMods cdk.ModMask)

Parses a string representing an accelerator. The format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or "<Release>z" (the last one is for key release). The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case, and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>". Key names are parsed using KeyvalFromName. For character keys the name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use "<Ctrl>minus" instead of "<Ctrl>-". If the parse fails, accelerator_key and accelerator_mods will be set to 0 (zero). Parameters: 

accelerator	string representing an accelerator

Returns: 

acceleratorKey	    keyval.
acceleratorMods	    modifier mask.

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorSetDefaultModMask 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorSetDefaultModMask(defaultModMask cdk.ModMask)

Sets the modifiers that will be considered significant for keyboard accelerators. The default mod mask is GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK | GDK_MOD1_MASK | GDK_SUPER_MASK | GDK_HYPER_MASK | GDK_META_MASK, that is, Control, Shift, Alt, Super, Hyper and Meta. Other modifiers will by default be ignored by AccelGroup. You must include at least the three modifiers Control, Shift and Alt in any value you pass to this function. The default mod mask should be changed on application startup, before using any accelerator groups. Parameters: 

defaultModMask	accelerator modifier mask

func (*CAccelGroup) AcceleratorValid 

func (a *CAccelGroup) AcceleratorValid(keyval cdk.Key, modifiers cdk.ModMask) (valid bool)

Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the GDK_a keyval plus GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator. But, you can't, for instance, use the GDK_Control_L keyval as an accelerator. Parameters: 

keyval	a GDK keyval
modifiers	modifier mask
returns	TRUE if the accelerator is valid

func (*CAccelGroup) Activate 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Activate(accelQuark cdk.QuarkID, acceleratable Object, accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (value bool)

Finds the first accelerator in accel_group that matches accel_key and accel_mods , and activates it. Parameters: 

accelQuark	the quark for the accelerator name
acceleratable	the GObject, usually a Window, on which

to activate the accelerator. 

accelKey	accelerator keyval from a key event
accelMods	keyboard state mask from a key event

Returns: 

TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress

func (*CAccelGroup) ConnectByPath 

func (a *CAccelGroup) ConnectByPath(accelPath string, closure GClosure)

Installs an accelerator in this group, using an accelerator path to look up the appropriate key and modifiers (see AccelMapAddEntry). When accel_group is being activated in response to a call to AccelGroupsActivate, closure will be invoked if the accel_key and accel_mods from AccelGroupsActivate match the key and modifiers for the path. The signature used for the closure is that of AccelGroupActivate. Note that accel_path string will be stored in a GQuark. Therefore, if you pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with g_intern_static_string. Parameters: 

accelGroup	the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
accelPath	path used for determining key and modifiers.
closure	closure to be executed upon accelerator activation

func (*CAccelGroup) DisconnectKey 

func (a *CAccelGroup) DisconnectKey(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (removed bool)

Removes an accelerator previously installed through Connect. Parameters: 

accelGroup	the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
accelKey	key value of the accelerator
accelMods	modifier combination of the accelerator
returns	TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be

removed, FALSE otherwise

func (*CAccelGroup) Find 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Find(findFunc AccelGroupFindFunc, data interface{}) (key *AccelKey)

Finds the first entry in an accelerator group for which find_func returns TRUE and returns its AccelKey. Parameters: 

findFunc	a function to filter the entries of accel_group

with 

data	data to pass to find_func

returns	the key of the first entry passing

find_func . The key is owned by CTK and must not be freed.

func (*CAccelGroup) FromAccelClosure 

func (a *CAccelGroup) FromAccelClosure(closure GClosure) (value AccelGroup)

Finds the AccelGroup to which closure is connected; see Connect. Parameters: 

closure	a GClosure

func (*CAccelGroup) GetIsLocked 

func (a *CAccelGroup) GetIsLocked() (locked bool)

Locks are added and removed using Lock and Unlock. Returns: 

TRUE if there are 1 or more locks on the accel_group , FALSE
otherwise.

func (*CAccelGroup) GetModifierMask 

func (a *CAccelGroup) GetModifierMask() (value cdk.ModMask)

Gets a cdk.ModMask representing the mask for this accel_group . For example, GDK_CONTROL_MASK, GDK_SHIFT_MASK, etc. Returns: 

the modifier mask for this accel group.

func (*CAccelGroup) Init 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Init() (already bool)

AccelGroup object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the AccelGroup instance

func (*CAccelGroup) Lock 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Lock()

Locks the given accelerator group. Locking an acelerator group prevents the accelerators contained within it to be changed during runtime. Refer to AccelMapChangeEntry about runtime accelerator changes. If called more than once, accel_group remains locked until Unlock has been called an equivalent number of times.

func (*CAccelGroup) Query 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Query(accelKey cdk.Key, accelMods cdk.ModMask) (entries []*AccelGroupEntry)

Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching accel_key and accel_mods . Parameters: 

accelGroup	the accelerator group to query
accelKey	key value of the accelerator
accelMods	modifier combination of the accelerator
nEntries	location to return the number of entries found, or NULL.
returns	an array of n_entries

AccelGroupEntry elements, or NULL. The array is owned by CTK and must not be freed.

func (*CAccelGroup) Unlock 

func (a *CAccelGroup) Unlock()

Undoes the last call to Lock on this accel_group .

type CAdjustment 

type CAdjustment struct {
	CObject
}

The CAdjustment structure implements the Adjustment interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Adjustment objects

func MakeAdjustment 

func MakeAdjustment() *CAdjustment

func NewAdjustment 

func NewAdjustment(value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize int) *CAdjustment

Factory method for convenient construction of new Adjustment objects

func (*CAdjustment) Changed 

func (a *CAdjustment) Changed() cdk.EventFlag

Cause a changed signal to be emitted. The changed signal reflects that one or more of the configurable aspects have changed, excluding the actual value of the Adjustment. See ValueChanged()

Emits: SignalChanged, Argv=[Adjustment instance] Returns: emission result EventFlag

func (*CAdjustment) ClampPage 

func (a *CAdjustment) ClampPage(upper, lower int)

Convenience method to set both the upper and lower bounds without emitting multiple changed signals. This method emits a clamp-page signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the new upper and lower bounds are applied and a call to Changed() is made

Emits: SignalClampPage, Argv=[Adjustment instance, given upper, given lower]

func (*CAdjustment) Configure 

func (a *CAdjustment) Configure(value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize int)

Set all of the configurable aspects of an Adjustment while emitting only a single changed and/or value-changed signal. The method emits a configure signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then applies all of the changes and calls Changed() and/or ValueChanged() accordingly. The same effect of this method can be achieved by passing the changed and value-changed signal emissions for the Adjustment instance, making all the individual calls to the setter methods, resuming the changed and value-changed signals and finally calling the Changed() and/or ValueChanged() methods accordingly

Parameters: 

value	the new value
lower	the new minimum value
upper	the new maximum value
stepIncrement	the new step increment
pageIncrement	the new page increment
pageSize	the new page size

Emits: SignalConfigure, Argv=[Adjustment instance, value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize]

func (*CAdjustment) GetLower 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetLower() (value int)

Returns the current lower bounds of the Adjustment

func (*CAdjustment) GetPageIncrement 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetPageIncrement() (pageIncrement int)

Returns the current page increment of the Adjustment. Adjustment values are intended to be increased or decreased by either a step or page amount. The page increment is the longer movement such as moving up or down half a page of text

func (*CAdjustment) GetPageSize 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetPageSize() (pageSize int)

Gets the page size of the Adjustment. Adjustment values are intended to be increased or decreased by either a step or page amount and having a separate Adjustment variable to track the end-user facing page size is beneficial. This value does not have to be the same as the page increment, however the page increment is in effect clamped to the page size of the Adjustment

func (*CAdjustment) GetStepIncrement 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetStepIncrement() (stepIncrement int)

Returns the current step increment of the Adjustment. Adjustment values are intended to be increased or decreased by either a step or page amount. The step increment is the shorter movement such as moving up or down a line of text

func (*CAdjustment) GetUpper 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetUpper() (upper int)

Returns the current lower bounds of the Adjustment

func (*CAdjustment) GetValue 

func (a *CAdjustment) GetValue() (value int)

Gets the current value of the adjustment. See SetValue. Returns: 

The current value of the adjustment.

func (*CAdjustment) Init 

func (a *CAdjustment) Init() bool

Adjustment object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Adjustment instance

func (*CAdjustment) Moot 

func (a *CAdjustment) Moot() bool

This method determines if the Adjustment object is in a "moot" state in which the values are irrelevant because the upper bounds is set to zero. Given an upper bounds of zero, the value and lower bounds are also clamped to zero and so on. Thus, this convenience method enables a human readable understanding of why the upper bounds is being checked for a zero value (eliminates a useful magic value)

func (*CAdjustment) SetLower 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetLower(lower int)

Sets the lower bounds of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-lower signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the value is applied and a call to Changed() is made

func (*CAdjustment) SetPageIncrement 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetPageIncrement(pageIncrement int)

Sets the page increment of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-step signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the value is applied and a call to Changed() is made

func (*CAdjustment) SetPageSize 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetPageSize(pageSize int)

Sets the page size of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-page-size signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the value is applied and a call to Changed() is made

func (*CAdjustment) SetStepIncrement 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetStepIncrement(stepIncrement int)

Sets the step increment of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-step signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the value is applied and a call to Changed() is made

func (*CAdjustment) SetUpper 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetUpper(upper int)

Sets the upper bounds of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-upper signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the value is applied and a call to Changed() is made

func (*CAdjustment) SetValue 

func (a *CAdjustment) SetValue(value int)

Sets the current value of the Adjustment. This method emits a set-value signal initially and if the listeners return an EVENT_PASS then the new value is applied and a call to ValueChanged() is made

Emits: SignalSetValue, Argv=[Adjustment instance, current value, new value]

func (*CAdjustment) Settings 

func (a *CAdjustment) Settings() (value, lower, upper, stepIncrement, pageIncrement, pageSize int)

Convenience method to retrieve all the configurable Adjustment values in one statement

func (*CAdjustment) ShowByPolicy 

func (a *CAdjustment) ShowByPolicy(policy PolicyType) bool

Convenience method that given a Policy, determine if the Adjustment should be rendered or otherwise used to an end-user-facing effect. This method is primarily used by other Widgets as a convenient way to determine if they should show or hide their presence

func (*CAdjustment) ValueChanged 

func (a *CAdjustment) ValueChanged() cdk.EventFlag

Cause a value-changed signal to be emitted. The value-changed signal reflects that the actual value of the Adjustment has changed

Emits: SignalValueChanged, Argv=[Adjustment instance] Returns: emission result EventFlag

type CAlignment 

type CAlignment struct {
	CBin
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CAlignment structure implements the Alignment interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Alignment objects

func MakeAlignment 

func MakeAlignment() *CAlignment

Default constructor for Alignment objects

func NewAlignment 

func NewAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64, xScale float64, yScale float64) *CAlignment

Constructor for Alignment objects

func (*CAlignment) Add 

func (a *CAlignment) Add(w Widget)

func (*CAlignment) Draw 

func (a *CAlignment) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CAlignment) Get 

func (a *CAlignment) Get() (xAlign, yAlign, xScale, yScale float64)

func (*CAlignment) GetPadding 

func (a *CAlignment) GetPadding() (paddingTop, paddingBottom, paddingLeft, paddingRight int)

Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget. See SetPadding. Parameters: 

paddingTop	location to store the padding for the top of the widget, or NULL.
paddingBottom	location to store the padding for the bottom of the widget, or NULL.
paddingLeft	location to store the padding for the left of the widget, or NULL.
paddingRight	location to store the padding for the right of the widget, or NULL.

func (*CAlignment) Init 

func (a *CAlignment) Init() (already bool)

Alignment object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Alignment instance

func (*CAlignment) Invalidate 

func (a *CAlignment) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CAlignment) Remove 

func (a *CAlignment) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CAlignment) Resize 

func (a *CAlignment) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CAlignment) Set 

func (a *CAlignment) Set(xAlign, yAlign, xScale, yScale float64)

Sets the Alignment values. Parameters: 

xAlign	the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
yAlign	the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
xScale	the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand. A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the space allocated for the Alignment.
yScale	the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to xScale .

func (*CAlignment) SetPadding 

func (a *CAlignment) SetPadding(paddingTop, paddingBottom, paddingLeft, paddingRight int)

Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget. The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance, this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding padding on the left. Parameters: 

paddingTop	the padding at the top of the widget
paddingBottom	the padding at the bottom of the widget
paddingLeft	the padding at the left of the widget
paddingRight	the padding at the right of the widget.

type CArrow 

type CArrow struct {
	CMisc
}

The CArrow structure implements the Arrow interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Arrow objects

func MakeArrow 

func MakeArrow() *CArrow

Default constructor for Arrow objects

func NewArrow 

func NewArrow(arrow ArrowType) *CArrow

Constructor for Arrow objects

func (*CArrow) Draw 

func (a *CArrow) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CArrow) GetArrowRune 

func (a *CArrow) GetArrowRune() (r rune, width int)

func (*CArrow) GetArrowType 

func (a *CArrow) GetArrowType() (arrow ArrowType)

func (*CArrow) GetSizeRequest 

func (a *CArrow) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

func (*CArrow) Init 

func (a *CArrow) Init() bool

Arrow object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Arrow instance

func (*CArrow) SetArrowType 

func (a *CArrow) SetArrowType(arrow ArrowType)

Sets the direction of the Arrow. Parameters: 

arrowType	a valid ArrowType.

type CBin 

type CBin struct {
	CContainer
}

The CBin structure implements the Bin interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Bin objects

func (*CBin) Add 

func (b *CBin) Add(w Widget)

Add the given widget to the Bin, if the Bin is full (has one child already) the given Widget replaces the existing Widget.

func (*CBin) GetChild 

func (b *CBin) GetChild() (value Widget)

Gets the child of the Bin, or NULL if the bin contains no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference added, so you do not need to unref it. Returns: 

pointer to child of the Bin.
[transfer none]

func (*CBin) Init 

func (b *CBin) Init() (already bool)

Bin object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Bin instance

type CBitFlags 

type CBitFlags uint64

func (CBitFlags) Clear 

func (b CBitFlags) Clear(f CBitFlags) CBitFlags

func (CBitFlags) Has 

func (b CBitFlags) Has(f CBitFlags) bool

func (CBitFlags) Set 

func (b CBitFlags) Set(f CBitFlags) CBitFlags

func (CBitFlags) Toggle 

func (b CBitFlags) Toggle(f CBitFlags) CBitFlags

type CBox 

type CBox struct {
	CContainer
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CBox structure implements the Box interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Box objects

func MakeBox 

func MakeBox() (box *CBox)

func NewBox 

func NewBox(orientation cdk.Orientation, homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CBox

func (*CBox) Add 

func (b *CBox) Add(child Widget)

func (*CBox) Build 

func (b *CBox) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CBox) Draw 

func (b *CBox) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CBox) GetFocusChain 

func (b *CBox) GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)

func (*CBox) GetHomogeneous 

func (b *CBox) GetHomogeneous() (value bool)

Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the same size). See SetHomogeneous. Returns: 

TRUE if the box is homogeneous.

func (*CBox) GetOrientation 

func (b *CBox) GetOrientation() (orientation cdk.Orientation)

Returns the orientation of the Box

func (*CBox) GetSpacing 

func (b *CBox) GetSpacing() (value int)

Gets the value set by SetSpacing. Returns: 

spacing between children

func (*CBox) Init 

func (b *CBox) Init() (already bool)

Box object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Box instance

func (*CBox) PackEnd 

func (b *CBox) PackEnd(child Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)

PackEnd

Adds child to box, packed with reference to the end of box. The child is packed after (away from end of) any other child packed with reference to the end of box.

Parameters

child the Widget to be added to box expand TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to box. 

The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of box
that use this option

fill TRUE if space given to child by the expand option is actually 

allocated to child , rather than just padding it. This parameter
has no effect if expand is set to FALSE. A child is always
allocated the full height of an HBox and the full width of a VBox.
This option affects the other dimension

padding extra space in pixels to put between this child and its neighbors, 

over and above the global amount specified by spacing property.
If child is a widget at one of the reference ends of box, then
padding pixels are also put between child and the reference edge of
box

func (*CBox) PackStart 

func (b *CBox) PackStart(child Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)

PackStart

Adds child to box, packed with reference to the start of box. The child is packed after any other child packed with reference to the start of box.

Parameters

child the Widget to be added to box expand TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated to box. 

The extra space will be divided evenly between all children of box
that use this option

fill TRUE if space given to child by the expand option is actually 

allocated to child, rather than just padding it. This parameter has
no effect if expand is set to FALSE. A child is always allocated
the full height of an HBox and the full width of a VBox. This
option affects the other dimension

padding extra space in pixels to put between this child and its neighbors, 

over and above the global amount specified by spacing property.
If child is a widget at one of the reference ends of box , then
padding pixels are also put between child and the reference edge of
box

func (*CBox) QueryChildPacking 

func (b *CBox) QueryChildPacking(child Widget) (expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)

Obtains information about how child is packed into box . Parameters: 

child	the Widget of the child to query
expand	pointer to return location for “expand” child property
fill	pointer to return location for “fill” child property
padding	pointer to return location for “padding” child property
packType	pointer to return location for “pack-type” child property

func (*CBox) Remove 

func (b *CBox) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CBox) ReorderChild 

func (b *CBox) ReorderChild(child Widget, position int)

Moves child to a new position in the list of box children. The list is the children field of Box, and contains both widgets packed GTK_PACK_START as well as widgets packed GTK_PACK_END, in the order that these widgets were added to box . A widget's position in the box children list determines where the widget is packed into box . A child widget at some position in the list will be packed just after all other widgets of the same packing type that appear earlier in the list. Parameters: 

child	    the Widget to move
position	the new position for child in the list of children of box,
            starting from 0. If negative, indicates the end of the list

func (*CBox) Resize 

func (b *CBox) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CBox) SetChildPacking 

func (b *CBox) SetChildPacking(child Widget, expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)

Sets the way child is packed into box . Parameters: 

child	the Widget of the child to set
expand	the new value of the “expand” child property
fill	the new value of the “fill” child property
padding	the new value of the “padding” child property
packType	the new value of the “pack-type” child property

func (*CBox) SetHomogeneous 

func (b *CBox) SetHomogeneous(homogeneous bool)

Sets the “homogeneous” property of box , controlling whether or not all children of box are given equal space in the box. Parameters: 

homogeneous	a boolean value, TRUE to create equal allotments,

FALSE for variable allotments

func (*CBox) SetOrientation 

func (b *CBox) SetOrientation(orientation cdk.Orientation)

Sets the orientation of the Box

func (*CBox) SetSpacing 

func (b *CBox) SetSpacing(spacing int)

Sets the “spacing” property of box , which is the number of pixels to place between children of box . Parameters: 

spacing	the number of pixels to put between children

func (*CBox) ShowAll 

func (b *CBox) ShowAll()

The Container type implements a version of Widget.ShowAll() where all the children of the Container have their ShowAll() method called, in addition to calling Show() on itself first.

type CBuilder 

type CBuilder struct {
	cdk.CObject
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

func (*CBuilder) AddNamedSignalHandler 

func (b *CBuilder) AddNamedSignalHandler(name string, fn cdk.SignalListenerFn)

func (*CBuilder) Build 

func (b *CBuilder) Build(element *CBuilderElement) (newObject interface{})

func (*CBuilder) BuildableTypeTags 

func (b *CBuilder) BuildableTypeTags() map[string]cdk.TypeTag

func (*CBuilder) GetWidget 

func (b *CBuilder) GetWidget(name string) (w interface{})

func (*CBuilder) GetWidgetsBuiltByType 

func (b *CBuilder) GetWidgetsBuiltByType(tag cdk.CTypeTag) (widgets []interface{})

func (*CBuilder) Init 

func (b *CBuilder) Init() (already bool)

func (*CBuilder) LoadFromString 

func (b *CBuilder) LoadFromString(raw string) (topElement *CBuilderElement, err error)

func (*CBuilder) LookupNamedSignalHandler 

func (b *CBuilder) LookupNamedSignalHandler(name string) (fn cdk.SignalListenerFn)

func (*CBuilder) ParsePacking 

func (b *CBuilder) ParsePacking(packing *CBuilderElement) (expand, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)

type CBuilderElement 

type CBuilderElement struct {
	TagName    string
	Content    string
	Builder    Builder
	Instance   interface{}
	Attributes map[string]string
	Properties map[string]string
	Signals    map[string]string
	Packing    map[string]string
	Children   []*CBuilderElement
}

func (*CBuilderElement) ApplyProperties 

func (b *CBuilderElement) ApplyProperties()

func (*CBuilderElement) ApplyProperty 

func (b *CBuilderElement) ApplyProperty(k, v string) (set bool)

func (*CBuilderElement) ApplySignal 

func (b *CBuilderElement) ApplySignal(k, v string)

func (*CBuilderElement) ApplySignals 

func (b *CBuilderElement) ApplySignals()

func (*CBuilderElement) String 

func (b *CBuilderElement) String() string

type CButton 

type CButton struct {
	CBin
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CButton structure implements the Button interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Button objects

func MakeButton 

func MakeButton() *CButton

Default constructor for Button objects

func NewButton 

func NewButton() *CButton

Constructor for Button objects

func NewButtonFromStock 

func NewButtonFromStock(stockId StockID) (value *CButton)

Creates a new Button containing the image and text from a stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like GTK_STOCK_OK and GTK_STOCK_APPLY. If stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic label (as for NewWithMnemonic). Parameters: 

stockId	the name of the stock item

Returns: 

a new Button

func NewButtonWithLabel 

func NewButtonWithLabel(text string) (b *CButton)

func NewButtonWithMnemonic 

func NewButtonWithMnemonic(text string) (b *CButton)

Creates a new Button containing a label. If characters in label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. Pressing Alt and that key activates the button. Parameters: 

label	The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the

mnemonic character

func NewButtonWithWidget 

func NewButtonWithWidget(w Widget) *CButton

Constructor with Widget for Button objects, uncertain this works as expected due to struct type information loss on interface filter

func (*CButton) Activate 

func (b *CButton) Activate() (value bool)

func (*CButton) Add 

func (b *CButton) Add(w Widget)

func (*CButton) Build 

func (b *CButton) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CButton) CancelEvent 

func (b *CButton) CancelEvent()

func (*CButton) Clicked 

func (b *CButton) Clicked() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButton) Draw 

func (b *CButton) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButton) GetAlignment 

func (b *CButton) GetAlignment() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

Gets the alignment of the child in the button. Parameters: 

xAlign	return location for horizontal alignment.
yAlign	return location for vertical alignment.

func (*CButton) GetDefaultChildren 

func (b *CButton) GetDefaultChildren() []Widget

func (*CButton) GetFocusChain 

func (b *CButton) GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)

func (*CButton) GetFocusOnClick 

func (b *CButton) GetFocusOnClick() (value bool)

Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse. See SetFocusOnClick. Returns: 

TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the
mouse.

func (*CButton) GetImage 

func (b *CButton) GetImage() (value Widget, ok bool)

Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of button . This may have been explicitly set by SetImage or constructed by NewFromStock. Returns: 

a Widget or NULL in case there is no image.
[transfer none]

func (*CButton) GetImagePosition 

func (b *CButton) GetImagePosition() (value PositionType)

Gets the position of the image relative to the text inside the button. Returns: 

the position

func (*CButton) GetLabel 

func (b *CButton) GetLabel() (value string)

Fetches the text from the label of the button, as set by SetLabel. If the label text has not been set the return value will be NULL. This will be the case if you create an empty button with New to use as a container. Returns: 

The text of the label widget. This string is owned by the
widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*CButton) GetPressed 

func (b *CButton) GetPressed() bool

func (*CButton) GetRelief 

func (b *CButton) GetRelief() (value ReliefStyle)

func (*CButton) GetSizeRequest 

func (b *CButton) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

func (*CButton) GetThemeRequest 

func (b *CButton) GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)

func (*CButton) GetUseStock 

func (b *CButton) GetUseStock() (value bool)

Returns whether the button label is a stock item. Returns: 

TRUE if the button label is used to select a stock item instead
of being used directly as the label text.

func (*CButton) GetUseUnderline 

func (b *CButton) GetUseUnderline() (value bool)

Returns whether an embedded underline in the button label indicates a mnemonic. See SetUseUnderline. Returns: 

TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label indicates the
mnemonic accelerator keys.

func (*CButton) GetWidgetAt 

func (b *CButton) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

func (*CButton) GrabEventFocus 

func (b *CButton) GrabEventFocus()

func (*CButton) GrabFocus 

func (b *CButton) GrabFocus()

If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CButton) Init 

func (b *CButton) Init() (already bool)

Button object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Button instance

func (*CButton) Invalidate 

func (b *CButton) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButton) ProcessEvent 

func (b *CButton) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButton) Remove 

func (b *CButton) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CButton) Resize 

func (b *CButton) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButton) SetAlignment 

func (b *CButton) SetAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless the child is a Misc or a Alignment. Parameters: 

xAlign	the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,

1.0 is right aligned 

yAlign	the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,

1.0 is bottom aligned

func (*CButton) SetFocusOnClick 

func (b *CButton) SetFocusOnClick(focusOnClick bool)

Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the application. Parameters: 

focusOnClick	whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse

func (*CButton) SetImage 

func (b *CButton) SetImage(image Widget)

Set the image of button to the given widget. Note that it depends on the gtk-button-images setting whether the image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call WidgetShow on image yourself. Parameters: 

image	a widget to set as the image for the button

func (*CButton) SetImagePosition 

func (b *CButton) SetImagePosition(position PositionType)

Sets the position of the image relative to the text inside the button. Parameters: 

position	the position

func (*CButton) SetLabel 

func (b *CButton) SetLabel(label string)

Sets the text of the label of the button to str . This text is also used to select the stock item if SetUseStock is used. This will also clear any previously set labels. Parameters: 

label	a string

func (*CButton) SetPressed 

func (b *CButton) SetPressed(pressed bool)

func (*CButton) SetRelief 

func (b *CButton) SetRelief(newStyle ReliefStyle)

func (*CButton) SetUseStock 

func (b *CButton) SetUseStock(useStock bool)

If TRUE, the label set on the button is used as a stock id to select the stock item for the button. Parameters: 

useStock	TRUE if the button should use a stock item

func (*CButton) SetUseUnderline 

func (b *CButton) SetUseUnderline(useUnderline bool)

If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key. Parameters: 

useUnderline	TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics

type CButtonBox 

type CButtonBox struct {
	CBox
}

The CButtonBox structure implements the ButtonBox interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with ButtonBox objects

func MakeButtonBox 

func MakeButtonBox() *CButtonBox

func NewButtonBox 

func NewButtonBox(orientation cdk.Orientation, homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CButtonBox

func (*CButtonBox) Add 

func (b *CButtonBox) Add(w Widget)

func (*CButtonBox) Build 

func (b *CButtonBox) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CButtonBox) Draw 

func (b *CButtonBox) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButtonBox) GetChildPrimary 

func (b *CButtonBox) GetChildPrimary(w Widget) (isPrimary bool)

Returns whether child should appear in the primary group of children. Parameters: 

child	a child of widget

Returns: 

whether child should appear in the primary group of children.

func (*CButtonBox) GetChildSecondary 

func (b *CButtonBox) GetChildSecondary(w Widget) (isSecondary bool)

Returns whether child should appear in a secondary group of children. Parameters: 

child	a child of widget

Returns: 

whether child should appear in a secondary group of children.

func (*CButtonBox) GetLayout 

func (b *CButtonBox) GetLayout() (value ButtonBoxStyle)

func (*CButtonBox) Hide 

func (b *CButtonBox) Hide()

func (*CButtonBox) Init 

func (b *CButtonBox) Init() (already bool)

ButtonBox object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the ButtonBox instance

func (*CButtonBox) Invalidate 

func (b *CButtonBox) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButtonBox) PackEnd 

func (b *CButtonBox) PackEnd(w Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)

func (*CButtonBox) PackStart 

func (b *CButtonBox) PackStart(w Widget, expand, fill bool, padding int)

func (*CButtonBox) Remove 

func (b *CButtonBox) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CButtonBox) Resize 

func (b *CButtonBox) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CButtonBox) SetChildPacking 

func (b *CButtonBox) SetChildPacking(child Widget, expand bool, fill bool, padding int, packType PackType)

Sets the way child is packed into box . Parameters: 

child	the Widget of the child to set
expand	the new value of the expand child property
fill	the new value of the fill child property
padding	the new value of the padding child property
packType	the new value of the pack-type child property

func (*CButtonBox) SetChildSecondary 

func (b *CButtonBox) SetChildSecondary(child Widget, isSecondary bool)

Sets whether child should appear in a secondary group of children. 

A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.

This group appears after the other children if the style 

is CTK_BUTTONBOX_START, CTK_BUTTONBOX_SPREAD or
CTK_BUTTONBOX_EDGE, and before the other children if the style
is CTK_BUTTONBOX_END. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
gtk_widget_set_direction()). If the style is CTK_BUTTONBOX_START
or CTK_BUTTONBOX_END, then the secondary children are aligned at
the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.

Parameters: 

child	a child of widget
secondary	if TRUE, the child appears in a secondary group of the button box.

func (*CButtonBox) SetLayout 

func (b *CButtonBox) SetLayout(layoutStyle ButtonBoxStyle)

Sets the layout for the ButtonBox. The normal expand and fill packing options are ignored in the context of a ButtonBox. The layout style instead defines the visual placement of the child widgets. The size request for each child determines it's allocation in the ButtonBox with the exception of the "expand" layout style in which the children are evenly allocated to consume all available space in the ButtonBox.

The different styles are as follows: 

"start"      group Widgets from the starting edge
"end"        group Widgets from the ending edge
"center"     group Widgets together in the center, away from edges
"spread"     spread Widgets evenly and centered, away form edges
"edge"       spread Widgets evenly and centered, flush with edges
"expand"     expand all Widgets to evenly consume all available space

func (*CButtonBox) Show 

func (b *CButtonBox) Show()

func (*CButtonBox) ShowAll 

func (b *CButtonBox) ShowAll()

type CContainer 

type CContainer struct {
	CWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CContainer structure implements the Container interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Container objects

func (*CContainer) Add 

func (c *CContainer) Add(w Widget)

Adds widget to container.Typically used for simple containers such as Window, Frame, or Button; for more complicated layout containers such as Box or Table, this function will pick default packing parameters that may not be correct. So consider functions such as Box.PackStart() and Table.Attach() as an alternative to Container.Add() in those cases. A Widget may be added to only one container at a time; you can't place the same widget inside two different containers. This method emits an add signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS then the change is applied

Parameters: 

widget	a widget to be placed inside container

Emits: SignalAdd, Argv=[Container instance, Widget instance]

func (*CContainer) AddWithProperties 

func (c *CContainer) AddWithProperties(widget Widget, argv ...interface{})

Adds widget to container, setting child properties at the same time. See Add and ChildSet for more details. Parameters: 

widget	a widget to be placed inside container
argv    a list of property names and values

func (*CContainer) Build 

func (c *CContainer) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CContainer) ChildGet 

func (c *CContainer) ChildGet(child Widget, properties ...cdk.Property) (values []interface{})

Gets the values of one or more child properties for child and container.

Parameters: 

child          a widget which is a child of container
properties...  one or more property names

Returns: 

an array of property values, in the order of the property names given, and
if the property named is not found, a Go error is returned for that
position of property names given

func (*CContainer) ChildSet 

func (c *CContainer) ChildSet(child Widget, argv ...interface{})

Sets one or more child properties for the given child in the container. Parameters: 

	child	a widget which is a child of container
 argv    a list of property name and value pairs

func (*CContainer) ChildType 

func (c *CContainer) ChildType() (value cdk.CTypeTag)

Returns the type of the children supported by the container. Note that this may return G_TYPE_NONE to indicate that no more children can be added, e.g. for a Paned which already has two children. Returns: 

a GType.

func (*CContainer) FindChildProperty 

func (c *CContainer) FindChildProperty(property cdk.Property) (value *cdk.CProperty)

Finds a child property of a container by name. Parameters: 

property		the name of the child property to find

Returns: 

  the cdk.CProperty of the child property or nil if there is no child
	 property with that name.

func (*CContainer) ForAll 

func (c *CContainer) ForAll(callback Callback, callbackData interface{})

Invokes callback on each child of container , including children that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user of the container, but were added by the container implementation itself. Most applications should use Foreach, rather than Forall. Parameters: 

callback	a callback
callbackData	callback user data

func (*CContainer) ForEach 

func (c *CContainer) ForEach(callback Callback, callbackData interface{})

Invokes callback on each non-internal child of container . See Forall for details on what constitutes an "internal" child. Most applications should use Foreach, rather than Forall. Parameters: 

callback	a callback.
callbackData	callback user data

func (*CContainer) GetBorderWidth 

func (c *CContainer) GetBorderWidth() (value int)

Retrieves the border width of the container. See SetBorderWidth. Returns: 

the current border width

func (*CContainer) GetChildProperty 

func (c *CContainer) GetChildProperty(child Widget, propertyName cdk.Property) (value interface{})

Gets the value of a child property for child and container . Parameters: 

child	a widget which is a child of container
propertyName	the name of the property to get

Returns: 

the value stored in the given property, or nil if the property

func (*CContainer) GetChildren 

func (c *CContainer) GetChildren() (children []Widget)

Returns the container's non-internal children. See Forall for details on what constitutes an "internal" child. Returns: 

a newly-allocated list of the container's non-internal
children.
[element-type Widget][transfer container]

func (*CContainer) GetFocusChain 

func (c *CContainer) GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)

Retrieves the focus chain of the container, if one has been set explicitly. If no focus chain has been explicitly set, CTK computes the focus chain based on the positions of the children.

Returns: 

focusableWidgets	widgets in the focus chain.
explicitlySet       TRUE if the focus chain has been set explicitly.

func (*CContainer) GetFocusChild 

func (c *CContainer) GetFocusChild() (value Widget)

Returns the current focus child widget inside container . This is not the currently focused widget. That can be obtained by calling WindowGetFocus. Returns: 

The child widget which will receive the focus inside container
when the container is focussed, or NULL if none is set.

func (*CContainer) GetFocusHAdjustment 

func (c *CContainer) GetFocusHAdjustment() (value Adjustment)

Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See SetFocusHAdjustment. Returns: 

the horizontal focus adjustment, or NULL if none has been set.
[transfer none]

func (*CContainer) GetFocusVAdjustment 

func (c *CContainer) GetFocusVAdjustment() (value Adjustment)

Retrieves the vertical focus adjustment for the container. See SetFocusVAdjustment. Returns: 

the vertical focus adjustment, or NULL if none has been set.
[transfer none]

func (*CContainer) GetWidgetAt 

func (c *CContainer) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

A wrapper around the Widget.GetWidgetAt() method that if the Container has the given Point2I within it's bounds, will return a itself, or if there is a child Widget at the given Point2I will return the child Widget. If the Container does not have the given point within it's bounds, will return nil

func (*CContainer) Init 

func (c *CContainer) Init() (already bool)

Container object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Container instance

func (*CContainer) InstallChildProperty 

func (c *CContainer) InstallChildProperty(name cdk.Property, kind cdk.PropertyType, write bool, def interface{}) error

Installs a child property on a container.

func (*CContainer) ListChildProperties 

func (c *CContainer) ListChildProperties() (properties []*cdk.CProperty)

Returns all child properties of a container class. Parameters: 

cclass	a ContainerClass.
nProperties	location to return the number of child properties found
returns	a newly

allocated NULL-terminated array of GParamSpec*. The array must be freed with g_free.

func (*CContainer) Remove 

func (c *CContainer) Remove(w Widget)

Removes Widget from container. Widget must be inside Container. This method emits a remove signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS then the change is applied

Parameters: 

widget	a current child of container

Emits: SignalRemove, Argv=[Container instance, Widget instance]

func (*CContainer) SetBorderWidth 

func (c *CContainer) SetBorderWidth(borderWidth int)

Sets the border width of the container. The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is Window; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside, they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to create a Alignment widget, call WidgetSetSizeRequest to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as a spacer. Parameters: 

borderWidth	amount of blank space to leave outside

the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.

func (*CContainer) SetChildProperty 

func (c *CContainer) SetChildProperty(child Widget, propertyName cdk.Property, value interface{})

Sets a child property for child and container . Parameters: 

child	a widget which is a child of container

propertyName	the name of the property to set
value	the value to set the property to

func (*CContainer) SetFocusChain 

func (c *CContainer) SetFocusChain(focusableWidgets []interface{})

Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by CTK. In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done when the focus chain is actually traversed. Parameters: 

focusableWidgets	the new focus chain.

func (*CContainer) SetFocusChild 

func (c *CContainer) SetFocusChild(child Widget)

Sets, or unsets if child is NULL, the focused child of container . This function emits the Container::set_focus_child signal of container . Implementations of Container can override the default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal. This is function is mostly meant to be used by widgets. Applications can use WidgetGrabFocus to manualy set the focus to a specific widget. Parameters: 

child	a Widget, or NULL.

func (*CContainer) SetFocusHAdjustment 

func (c *CContainer) SetFocusHAdjustment(adjustment Adjustment)

Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to show that widget. This function sets the horizontal alignment. See ScrolledWindowGetHadjustment for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment and SetFocusVadjustment for setting the vertical adjustment. The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children of the container. Parameters: 

adjustment	an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus is

moved among the descendents of container

func (*CContainer) SetFocusVAdjustment 

func (c *CContainer) SetFocusVAdjustment(adjustment Adjustment)

Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See ScrolledWindowGetVAdjustment for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment and SetFocusHAdjustment for setting the horizontal adjustment. The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children of the container. Parameters: 

adjustment	an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus

is moved among the descendents of container

func (*CContainer) SetOrigin 

func (c *CContainer) SetOrigin(x, y int)

func (*CContainer) SetWindow 

func (c *CContainer) SetWindow(w Window)

func (*CContainer) ShowAll 

func (c *CContainer) ShowAll()

The Container type implements a version of Widget.ShowAll() where all the children of the Container have their ShowAll() method called, in addition to calling Show() on itself first.

func (*CContainer) UnsetFocusChain 

func (c *CContainer) UnsetFocusChain()

Removes a focus chain explicitly set with SetFocusChain.

type CDialog 

type CDialog struct {
	CWindow
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CDialog structure implements the Dialog interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Dialog objects

func MakeDialog 

func MakeDialog() *CDialog

Default constructor for Dialog objects

func NewDialog 

func NewDialog() (value *CDialog)

Constructor for Dialog objects

func NewDialogWithButtons 

func NewDialogWithButtons(title string, parent Window, flags DialogFlags, argv ...interface{}) (value *CDialog)

Creates a new Dialog with title title (or NULL for the default title; see WindowSetTitle) and transient parent parent (or NULL for none; see WindowSetTransientFor). The flags argument can be used to make the dialog modal (GTK_DIALOG_MODAL) and/or to have it destroyed along with its transient parent (GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT). After flags , button text/response ID pairs should be listed, with a NULL pointer ending the list. Button text can be either a stock ID such as GTK_STOCK_OK, or some arbitrary text. A response ID can be any positive number, or one of the values in the ResponseType enumeration. If the user clicks one of these dialog buttons, Dialog will emit the “response” signal with the corresponding response ID. If a Dialog receives the “delete-event” signal, it will emit ::response with a response ID of GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. However, destroying a dialog does not emit the ::response signal; so be careful relying on ::response when using the GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT flag. Buttons are from left to right, so the first button in the list will be the leftmost button in the dialog. Here's a simple example: Parameters: 

title	Title of the dialog, or NULL.
parent	Transient parent of the dialog, or NULL.
flags	from DialogFlags
firstButtonText	stock ID or text to go in first button, or NULL.
varargs	response ID for first button, then additional buttons, ending with NULL

Returns: 

a new Dialog

func (*CDialog) AddActionWidget 

func (d *CDialog) AddActionWidget(child Widget, responseId ResponseType)

Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a Dialog, connecting a signal handler that will emit the “response” signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is appended to the end of the dialog's action area. If you want to add a non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the action_area field of the Dialog struct. Parameters: 

child	an activatable widget
responseId	response ID for child

func (*CDialog) AddButton 

func (d *CDialog) AddButton(buttonText string, responseId ResponseType) (value Button)

Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text is a stock ID) and sets things up so that clicking the button will emit the “response” signal with the given response_id . The button is appended to the end of the dialog's action area. The button widget is returned, but usually you don't need it. Parameters: 

buttonText	text of button, or stock ID
responseId	response ID for the button

Returns: 

the button widget that was added.
[transfer none]

func (*CDialog) AddButtons 

func (d *CDialog) AddButtons(argv ...interface{})

Adds more buttons, same as calling AddButton repeatedly. The variable argument list should be NULL-terminated as with NewWithButtons. Each button must have both text and response ID. Parameters: 

firstButtonText	button text or stock ID
varargs	response ID for first button, then more text-response_id pairs

func (*CDialog) AddSecondaryActionWidget 

func (d *CDialog) AddSecondaryActionWidget(child Widget, responseId ResponseType)

func (*CDialog) Build 

func (d *CDialog) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CDialog) Destroy 

func (d *CDialog) Destroy()

func (*CDialog) Draw 

func (d *CDialog) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CDialog) GetActionArea 

func (d *CDialog) GetActionArea() (value ButtonBox)

Returns the action area of dialog . Returns: 

the action area.
[transfer none]

func (*CDialog) GetContentArea 

func (d *CDialog) GetContentArea() (value VBox)

Returns the content area of dialog . Returns: 

the content area VBox.
[transfer none]

func (*CDialog) GetResponseForWidget 

func (d *CDialog) GetResponseForWidget(widget Widget) (value ResponseType)

Gets the response id of a widget in the action area of a dialog. Parameters: 

widget	a widget in the action area of dialog

Returns: 

the response id of widget , or GTK_RESPONSE_NONE if widget
doesn't have a response id set.

func (*CDialog) GetWidgetForResponse 

func (d *CDialog) GetWidgetForResponse(responseId ResponseType) (value Widget)

Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area of a dialog. Parameters: 

responseId	the response ID used by the dialog

widget Returns: 

the widget button that uses the given response_id , or NULL.
[transfer none]

func (*CDialog) Init 

func (d *CDialog) Init() (already bool)

Dialog object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Dialog instance

func (*CDialog) Invalidate 

func (d *CDialog) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CDialog) ProcessEvent 

func (d *CDialog) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CDialog) Resize 

func (d *CDialog) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CDialog) Response 

func (d *CDialog) Response(responseId ResponseType)

Emits the “response” signal with the given response ID. Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way; typically either you or Run will be monitoring the ::response signal and take appropriate action. Parameters: 

responseId	response ID

func (*CDialog) Run 

func (d *CDialog) Run() (response chan ResponseType)

Blocks in a recursive main loop until the dialog either emits the “response” signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is destroyed during the call to Run, Run returns GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the ::response signal emission. Before entering the recursive main loop, Run calls WidgetShow on the dialog for you. Note that you still need to show any children of the dialog yourself. During Run, the default behavior of “delete-event” is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be destroyed as windows usually are, and Run will return GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during Run the dialog will be modal. You can force Run to return at any time by calling Response to emit the ::response signal. Destroying the dialog during Run is a very bad idea, because your post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not. After Run returns, you are responsible for hiding or destroying the dialog if you wish to do so. Typical usage of this function might be: Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, will be triggered during a Run call. Returns: 

response ID

func (*CDialog) SetDefaultResponse 

func (d *CDialog) SetDefaultResponse(responseId ResponseType)

Sets the last widget in the dialog's action area with the given response_id as the default widget for the dialog. Pressing "Enter" normally activates the default widget. Parameters: 

responseId	a response ID

func (*CDialog) SetResponseSensitive 

func (d *CDialog) SetResponseSensitive(responseId ResponseType, sensitive bool)

Calls WidgetSetSensitive (widget, setting ) for each widget in the dialog's action area with the given response_id . A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons. Parameters: 

responseId	a response ID
setting	TRUE for sensitive

func (*CDialog) Show 

func (d *CDialog) Show()

type CEventBox 

type CEventBox struct {
	CBin
}

The CEventBox structure implements the EventBox interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with EventBox objects

func MakeEventBox 

func MakeEventBox() *CEventBox

Default constructor for EventBox objects

func NewEventBox 

func NewEventBox() (value *CEventBox)

Constructor for EventBox objects

func (*CEventBox) Activate 

func (b *CEventBox) Activate() (value bool)

func (*CEventBox) CancelEvent 

func (b *CEventBox) CancelEvent()

func (*CEventBox) GetAboveChild 

func (e *CEventBox) GetAboveChild() (value bool)

Returns whether the event box window is above or below the windows of its child. See SetAboveChild for details. Returns: 

TRUE if the event box window is above the window of its child.

func (*CEventBox) GetVisibleWindow 

func (e *CEventBox) GetVisibleWindow() (value bool)

Returns whether the event box has a visible window. See SetVisibleWindow for details. Returns: 

TRUE if the event box window is visible

func (*CEventBox) GrabFocus 

func (b *CEventBox) GrabFocus()

If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CEventBox) Init 

func (b *CEventBox) Init() (already bool)

EventBox object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the EventBox instance

func (*CEventBox) ProcessEvent 

func (b *CEventBox) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CEventBox) SetAboveChild 

func (e *CEventBox) SetAboveChild(aboveChild bool)

Set whether the event box window is positioned above the windows of its child, as opposed to below it. If the window is above, all events inside the event box will go to the event box. If the window is below, events in windows of child widgets will first got to that widget, and then to its parents. The default is to keep the window below the child. Parameters: 

aboveChild	TRUE if the event box window is above the windows of its child

func (*CEventBox) SetVisibleWindow 

func (e *CEventBox) SetVisibleWindow(visibleWindow bool)

Set whether the event box uses a visible or invisible child window. The default is to use visible windows. In an invisible window event box, the window that the event box creates is a GDK_INPUT_ONLY window, which means that it is invisible and only serves to receive events. A visible window event box creates a visible (GDK_INPUT_OUTPUT) window that acts as the parent window for all the widgets contained in the event box. You should generally make your event box invisible if you just want to trap events. Creating a visible window may cause artifacts that are visible to the user, especially if the user is using a theme with gradients or pixmaps. The main reason to create a non input-only event box is if you want to set the background to a different color or draw on it. Parameters: 

visibleWindow	boolean value

type CFakeWindow 

type CFakeWindow struct {
	CWindow
}

func (*CFakeWindow) FakeDraw 

func (f *CFakeWindow) FakeDraw() (canvas cdk.Canvas, flag cdk.EventFlag)

func (*CFakeWindow) Init 

func (f *CFakeWindow) Init() (already bool)

type CFrame 

type CFrame struct {
	CBin
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CFrame structure implements the Frame interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Frame objects

func MakeFrame 

func MakeFrame() *CFrame

Default constructor for Frame objects

func NewFrame 

func NewFrame(text string) *CFrame

construct a new frame with a default widget containing the given text

func NewFrameWithWidget 

func NewFrameWithWidget(w Widget) *CFrame

construct a new frame with the given widget instead of the normal label

func (*CFrame) Add 

func (f *CFrame) Add(w Widget)

func (*CFrame) Draw 

func (f *CFrame) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CFrame) GetFocusWithChild 

func (f *CFrame) GetFocusWithChild() (focusWithChild bool)

func (*CFrame) GetLabel 

func (f *CFrame) GetLabel() (value string)

If the frame's label widget is a Label, returns the text in the label widget. (The frame will have a Label for the label widget if a non-NULL argument was passed to New.) Returns: 

the text in the label, or NULL if there was no label widget or
the lable widget was not a Label. This string is owned by
CTK and must not be modified or freed.

func (*CFrame) GetLabelAlign 

func (f *CFrame) GetLabelAlign() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame's label. See SetLabelAlign. Parameters: 

xAlign	X alignment of frame's label
yAlign	Y alignment of frame's label

func (*CFrame) GetLabelWidget 

func (f *CFrame) GetLabelWidget() (value Widget)

Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See SetLabelWidget. Returns: 

the label widget, or NULL if there is none.
[transfer none]

func (*CFrame) GetShadowType 

func (f *CFrame) GetShadowType() (value ShadowType)

Retrieves the shadow type of the frame. See SetShadowType. Returns: 

the current shadow type of the frame.

func (*CFrame) GetSizeRequest 

func (f *CFrame) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

func (*CFrame) GetThemeRequest 

func (f *CFrame) GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)

Returns the current theme, adjusted for Widget focus and accounting for any PARENT_SENSITIVE conditions. This method is primarily useful in drawable Widget types during the Invalidate() and Draw() stages of the Widget lifecycle

func (*CFrame) GetWidgetAt 

func (f *CFrame) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

func (*CFrame) GrabFocus 

func (f *CFrame) GrabFocus()

If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CFrame) Init 

func (f *CFrame) Init() (already bool)

Frame object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Frame instance

func (*CFrame) Invalidate 

func (f *CFrame) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CFrame) IsFocus 

func (f *CFrame) IsFocus() bool

func (*CFrame) Remove 

func (f *CFrame) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CFrame) Resize 

func (f *CFrame) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CFrame) SetFocusWithChild 

func (f *CFrame) SetFocusWithChild(focusWithChild bool)

func (*CFrame) SetLabel 

func (f *CFrame) SetLabel(label string)

Sets the text of the label. If label is NULL, the current label is removed. Parameters: 

label	the text to use as the label of the frame.

func (*CFrame) SetLabelAlign 

func (f *CFrame) SetLabelAlign(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

Sets the alignment of the frame widget's label. The default values for a newly created frame are 0.0 and 0.5. Parameters: 

xAlign	The position of the label along the top edge of the widget. A value
        of 0.0 represents left alignment; 1.0 represents right alignment.
yAlign	The y alignment of the label. A value of 0.0 aligns under the frame;
        1.0 aligns above the frame. If the values are exactly 0.0 or 1.0 the
        gap in the frame won't be painted because the label will be
        completely above or below the frame.

func (*CFrame) SetLabelWidget 

func (f *CFrame) SetLabelWidget(labelWidget Widget)

Sets the label widget for the frame. This is the widget that will appear embedded in the top edge of the frame as a title. Parameters: 

labelWidget	the new label widget

func (*CFrame) SetShadowType 

func (f *CFrame) SetShadowType(shadowType ShadowType)

Sets the shadow type for frame . Parameters: 

type	the new ShadowType

type CHBox 

type CHBox struct {
	CBox
}

func MakeHBox 

func MakeHBox() *CHBox

func NewHBox 

func NewHBox(homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CHBox

func (*CHBox) Init 

func (b *CHBox) Init() bool

type CHButtonBox 

type CHButtonBox struct {
	CButtonBox
}

func MakeHButtonBox 

func MakeHButtonBox() *CHButtonBox

func NewHButtonBox 

func NewHButtonBox(homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CHButtonBox

func (*CHButtonBox) Init 

func (b *CHButtonBox) Init() bool

type CHScrollbar 

type CHScrollbar struct {
	CScrollbar
}

func MakeHScrollbar 

func MakeHScrollbar() *CHScrollbar

func NewHScrollbar 

func NewHScrollbar() *CHScrollbar

func (*CHScrollbar) Init 

func (s *CHScrollbar) Init() (already bool)

type CLabel 

type CLabel struct {
	CMisc
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CLabel structure implements the Label interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Label objects

func MakeLabel 

func MakeLabel() *CLabel

Default constructor for Label objects

func NewLabel 

func NewLabel(plain string) *CLabel

func NewLabelWithMarkup 

func NewLabelWithMarkup(markup string) (label *CLabel, err error)

func NewLabelWithMnemonic 

func NewLabelWithMnemonic(str string) (value *CLabel)

Creates a new Label, containing the text in str . If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined. If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using SetMnemonicWidget. If SetMnemonicWidget is not called, then the first activatable ancestor of the Label will be chosen as the mnemonic widget. For instance, if the label is inside a button or menu item, the button or menu item will automatically become the mnemonic widget and be activated by the mnemonic. Parameters: 

str	The text of the label, with an underscore in front of the

mnemonic character Returns: 

the new Label

func (*CLabel) Build 

func (l *CLabel) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CLabel) Draw 

func (l *CLabel) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CLabel) GetAttributes 

func (l *CLabel) GetAttributes() (value cdk.Style)

Gets the attribute list that was set on the label using SetAttributes, if any. This function does not reflect attributes that come from the labels markup (see SetMarkup). If you want to get the effective attributes for the label, use pango_layout_get_attribute (GetLayout (label)). Returns: 

the attribute list, or NULL if none was set.
[transfer none]

func (*CLabel) GetCleanText 

func (l *CLabel) GetCleanText() (text string)

func (*CLabel) GetClearText 

func (l *CLabel) GetClearText() (text string)

func (*CLabel) GetCurrentUri 

func (l *CLabel) GetCurrentUri() (value string)

Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label. The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently positioned. This function is intended for use in a “activate-link” handler or for use in a “query-tooltip” handler. Returns: 

the currently active URI. The string is owned by CTK and must
not be freed or modified.

func (*CLabel) GetEllipsize 

func (l *CLabel) GetEllipsize() (value bool)

Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See SetEllipsize. Returns: 

PangoEllipsizeMode

func (*CLabel) GetJustify 

func (l *CLabel) GetJustify() (value cdk.Justification)

Returns the justification of the label. See SetJustify. Returns: 

Justification

func (*CLabel) GetLabel 

func (l *CLabel) GetLabel() (value string)

Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. (See GetText). Returns: 

the text of the label widget. This string is owned by the
widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*CLabel) GetLineWrap 

func (l *CLabel) GetLineWrap() (value bool)

Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped. See SetLineWrap. Returns: 

TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.

func (*CLabel) GetLineWrapMode 

func (l *CLabel) GetLineWrapMode() (value cdk.WrapMode)

Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See SetLineWrapMode. Returns: 

the current cdk.WrapMode

func (*CLabel) GetMaxWidthChars 

func (l *CLabel) GetMaxWidthChars() (value int)

Retrieves the desired maximum width of label , in characters. See SetWidthChars. Returns: 

the maximum width of the label in characters.

func (*CLabel) GetMnemonicKeyVal 

func (l *CLabel) GetMnemonicKeyVal() (value rune)

If the label has been set so that it has an mnemonic key this function returns the keyval used for the mnemonic accelerator. If there is no mnemonic set up it returns GDK_VoidSymbol. Returns: 

GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or GDK_VoidSymbol

func (*CLabel) GetMnemonicWidget 

func (l *CLabel) GetMnemonicWidget() (value Widget)

Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this label. See SetMnemonicWidget. Returns: 

the target of the label's mnemonic, or NULL if none has been
set and the default algorithm will be used.
[transfer none]

func (*CLabel) GetPlainText 

func (l *CLabel) GetPlainText() (text string)

func (*CLabel) GetPlainTextInfo 

func (l *CLabel) GetPlainTextInfo() (maxWidth, lineCount int)

func (*CLabel) GetPlainTextInfoAtWidth 

func (l *CLabel) GetPlainTextInfoAtWidth(width int) (maxWidth, lineCount int)

func (*CLabel) GetSelectable 

func (l *CLabel) GetSelectable() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetSelectable. Returns: 

TRUE if the user can copy text from the label

func (*CLabel) GetSelectionBounds 

func (l *CLabel) GetSelectionBounds() (start int, end int, nonEmpty bool)

Gets the selected range of characters in the label, returning TRUE if there's a selection. Parameters: 

start	return location for start of selection, as a character offset.
end	return location for end of selection, as a character offset.

Returns: 

TRUE if selection is non-empty

func (*CLabel) GetSingleLineMode 

func (l *CLabel) GetSingleLineMode() (value bool)

Returns whether the label is in single line mode. Returns: 

TRUE when the label is in single line mode.

func (*CLabel) GetSizeRequest 

func (l *CLabel) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

func (*CLabel) GetText 

func (l *CLabel) GetText() (value string)

Fetches the text from a label widget, as displayed on the screen. This does not include any embedded underlines indicating mnemonics or Tango markup. (See GetLabel) Returns: 

the text in the label widget.

func (l *CLabel) GetTrackVisitedLinks() (value bool)

Returns whether the label is currently keeping track of clicked links. Returns: 

TRUE if clicked links are remembered

func (*CLabel) GetUseMarkup 

func (l *CLabel) GetUseMarkup() (value bool)

Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with the Pango text markup language. See SetUseMarkup. Returns: 

TRUE if the label's text will be parsed for markup.

func (*CLabel) GetUseUnderline 

func (l *CLabel) GetUseUnderline() (value bool)

Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a mnemonic. See SetUseUnderline. Returns: 

TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates the
mnemonic accelerator keys.

func (*CLabel) GetWidthChars 

func (l *CLabel) GetWidthChars() (value int)

Retrieves the desired width of label , in characters. See SetWidthChars. Returns: 

the width of the label in characters.

func (*CLabel) Init 

func (l *CLabel) Init() (already bool)

Label object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Label instance

func (*CLabel) Invalidate 

func (l *CLabel) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CLabel) Resize 

func (l *CLabel) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CLabel) SelectRegion 

func (l *CLabel) SelectRegion(startOffset int, endOffset int)

Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable. See SetSelectable. If the label is not selectable, this function has no effect. If start_offset or end_offset are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted. Parameters: 

startOffset	start offset (in characters not bytes)
endOffset	end offset (in characters not bytes)

func (*CLabel) SetAttributes 

func (l *CLabel) SetAttributes(attrs cdk.Style)

Sets a PangoAttrList; the attributes in the list are applied to the label text. Parameters: 

attrs	a PangoAttrList

func (*CLabel) SetEllipsize 

func (l *CLabel) SetEllipsize(mode bool)

Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text if there is not enough space to render the entire string. Parameters: 

mode	bool

func (*CLabel) SetJustify 

func (l *CLabel) SetJustify(justify cdk.Justification)

Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to each other. GTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT is the default value when the widget is first created with New. If you instead want to set the alignment of the label as a whole, use MiscSetAlignment instead. SetJustify has no effect on labels containing only a single line. Parameters: 

jtype	a Justification

func (*CLabel) SetLabel 

func (l *CLabel) SetLabel(str string)

Sets the text of the label. The label is interpreted as including embedded underlines and/or Pango markup depending on the values of the “use-underline”" and “use-markup” properties. Parameters: 

str	the new text to set for the label

func (*CLabel) SetLineWrap 

func (l *CLabel) SetLineWrap(wrap bool)

Toggles line wrapping within the Label widget. TRUE makes it break lines if text exceeds the widget's size. FALSE lets the text get cut off by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size. Note that setting line wrapping to TRUE does not make the label wrap at its parent container's width, because CTK widgets conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position, set the label's width using SetSizeRequest. Parameters: 

wrap	the setting

func (*CLabel) SetLineWrapMode 

func (l *CLabel) SetLineWrapMode(wrapMode cdk.WrapMode)

If line wrapping is on (see SetLineWrap) this controls how the line wrapping is done. The default is PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means wrap on word boundaries. Parameters: 

wrapMode	the line wrapping mode

func (*CLabel) SetMarkup 

func (l *CLabel) SetMarkup(text string) (parseError error)

Parses str which is marked up with the Pango text markup language, setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If the str is external data, you may need to escape it with g_markup_escape_text or g_markup_printf_escaped: Parameters: 

str	a markup string (see Pango markup format)

func (*CLabel) SetMarkupWithMnemonic 

func (l *CLabel) SetMarkupWithMnemonic(str string) (err error)

Parses str which is marked up with the Pango text markup language, setting the label's text and attribute list based on the parse results. If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using SetMnemonicWidget. Parameters: 

str	a markup string (see Pango markup format)

func (*CLabel) SetMaxWidthChars 

func (l *CLabel) SetMaxWidthChars(nChars int)

Sets the desired maximum width in characters of label to n_chars . Parameters: 

nChars	the new desired maximum width, in characters.

func (*CLabel) SetMnemonicWidget 

func (l *CLabel) SetMnemonicWidget(widget Widget)

If the label has been set so that it has an mnemonic key (using i.e. SetMarkupWithMnemonic, SetTextWithMnemonic, NewWithMnemonic or the "use_underline" property) the label can be associated with a widget that is the target of the mnemonic. When the label is inside a widget (like a Button or a Notebook tab) it is automatically associated with the correct widget, but sometimes (i.e. when the target is a Entry next to the label) you need to set it explicitly using this function. The target widget will be accelerated by emitting the Widget::mnemonic-activate signal on it. The default handler for this signal will activate the widget if there are no mnemonic collisions and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise. Parameters: 

widget	the target Widget.

func (*CLabel) SetSelectable 

func (l *CLabel) SetSelectable(setting bool)

Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for copy-and-paste. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to allow selecting text in the label

func (*CLabel) SetSingleLineMode 

func (l *CLabel) SetSingleLineMode(singleLineMode bool)

Sets whether the label is in single line mode. Parameters: 

singleLineMode	TRUE if the label should be in single line mode

func (*CLabel) SetText 

func (l *CLabel) SetText(text string)

Sets the text within the Label widget. It overwrites any text that was there before. This will also clear any previously set mnemonic accelerators. Parameters: 

str	The text you want to set

func (*CLabel) SetTextWithMnemonic 

func (l *CLabel) SetTextWithMnemonic(str string)

Sets the label's text from the string str . If characters in str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic. The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen automatically, or explicitly using SetMnemonicWidget. Parameters: 

str	a string

func (*CLabel) SetTheme 

func (l *CLabel) SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)

Set the Theme for the Widget instance. This will also refresh the requested theme. A request theme is a transient theme, based on the actually set theme and adjusted for focus. If the given theme is equivalent to the current theme then no action is taken. After verifying that the given theme is different, this method emits a set-theme signal and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied and the Widget.Invalidate() method is called 

func (l *CLabel) SetTrackVisitedLinks(trackLinks bool)

Sets whether the label should keep track of clicked links (and use a different color for them). Parameters: 

trackLinks	TRUE to track visited links

func (*CLabel) SetUseMarkup 

func (l *CLabel) SetUseMarkup(setting bool)

Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in Pango's text markup language. See SetMarkup. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE if the label's text should be parsed for markup.

func (*CLabel) SetUseUnderline 

func (l *CLabel) SetUseUnderline(setting bool)

If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics

func (*CLabel) SetWidthChars 

func (l *CLabel) SetWidthChars(nChars int)

Sets the desired width in characters of label to n_chars . Parameters: 

nChars	the new desired width, in characters.

type CListDragPos 

type CListDragPos uint64

List drag pos 

const (
	CLIST_DRAC_NONE CListDragPos = iota
	CLIST_DRAC_BEFORE
	CLIST_DRAC_INTO
	CLIST_DRAC_AFTER
)

type CMisc 

type CMisc struct {
	CWidget
}

The CMisc structure implements the Misc interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Misc objects

func (*CMisc) GetAlignment 

func (m *CMisc) GetAlignment() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation. See SetAlignment. Parameters: 

xAlign  location to store X alignment of misc

, or NULL. 

yAlign  location to store Y alignment of misc

, or NULL.

func (*CMisc) GetPadding 

func (m *CMisc) GetPadding() (xPad int, yPad int)

Gets the padding in the X and Y directions of the widget. See SetPadding. Parameters: 

xPad    location to store padding in the X

direction, or NULL. 

yPad    location to store padding in the Y

direction, or NULL.

func (*CMisc) Init 

func (m *CMisc) Init() (already bool)

Misc object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Misc instance

func (*CMisc) SetAlignment 

func (m *CMisc) SetAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)

func (*CMisc) SetPadding 

func (m *CMisc) SetPadding(xPad int, yPad int)

type CObject 

type CObject struct {
	cdk.CObject
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CObject structure implements the Object interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with CTK objects

func (*CObject) Build 

func (o *CObject) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CObject) CssSelector 

func (o *CObject) CssSelector() (selector string)

return a selector string identifying this exact Object instance.

func (*CObject) Draw 

func (o *CObject) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

Emits a draw signal, primarily used to render canvases and cause end-user facing display updates. Signal listeners can draw to the Canvas and return EVENT_STOP to cause those changes to be composited upon the larger display canvas

Emits: SignalDraw, Argv=[Object instance, canvas]

func (*CObject) GetAllocation 

func (o *CObject) GetAllocation() cdk.Rectangle

Returns the current allocation size of the Object instance

func (*CObject) GetCssBool 

func (o *CObject) GetCssBool(name cdk.Property) (value bool, err error)

func (*CObject) GetCssColor 

func (o *CObject) GetCssColor(name cdk.Property) (value cdk.Color, err error)

func (*CObject) GetCssFloat 

func (o *CObject) GetCssFloat(name cdk.Property) (value float64, err error)

func (*CObject) GetCssInt 

func (o *CObject) GetCssInt(name cdk.Property) (value int, err error)

func (*CObject) GetCssProperties 

func (o *CObject) GetCssProperties() (properties []*cdk.CProperty)

func (*CObject) GetCssProperty 

func (o *CObject) GetCssProperty(name cdk.Property) (property *cdk.CProperty)

func (*CObject) GetCssString 

func (o *CObject) GetCssString(name cdk.Property) (value string, err error)

func (*CObject) GetObjectAt 

func (o *CObject) GetObjectAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Object

Returns the Object's instance if the given point is within the Object's display space bounds. This method is mainly used by Window objects and other event processing Widgets that need to find a Widget by mouse-cursor coordinates for example. If this Object does not encompasses the point given, it returns nil

func (*CObject) GetOrigin 

func (o *CObject) GetOrigin() cdk.Point2I

Returns the current origin point of the Object instance

func (*CObject) GetTextDirection 

func (o *CObject) GetTextDirection() (direction TextDirection)

Returns the current text direction for this Object instance

func (*CObject) HasPoint 

func (o *CObject) HasPoint(p *cdk.Point2I) (contains bool)

Determines whether or not the given point is within the Object's display space bounds

func (*CObject) Init 

func (o *CObject) Init() (already bool)

CTK object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Object instance

func (*CObject) InstallCssProperty 

func (o *CObject) InstallCssProperty(name cdk.Property, kind cdk.PropertyType, write bool, def interface{}) (err error)

func (*CObject) Invalidate 

func (o *CObject) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

Emits an invalidate signal, primarily used in other CTK types which are drawable and need an opportunity to invalidate the render canvases so that the next CTK draw cycle can reflect the latest changes to the Object instance

Emits: SignalInvalidate, Argv=[Object instance]

func (*CObject) ObjectInfo 

func (o *CObject) ObjectInfo() string

Convenience method to return a string identifying the Object instance with it's type, unique identifier, name if set (see SetName()), the origin point and current size allocation

func (*CObject) ProcessEvent 

func (o *CObject) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

Emits a cdk-event signal, primarily used to consume CDK events received such as mouse or key events in other CTK and custom types that embed CObject

Emits: SignalCdkEvent, Argv=[Object instance, event]

func (*CObject) Resize 

func (o *CObject) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

Emits a resize signal, primarily used to make adjustments or otherwise reallocate resources necessary for subsequent draw events

Emits: SignalResize, Argv=[Object instance, allocated size]

func (*CObject) SetAllocation 

func (o *CObject) SetAllocation(size cdk.Rectangle)

Set the allocated size of the Object instance. This method is only useful for custom CTK types that need to render child Widgets. This method emits an allocation signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS the change is applied and constrained to a minimum width and height of zero

func (*CObject) SetOrigin 

func (o *CObject) SetOrigin(x, y int)

Set the origin of this instance in display space. This method emits an origin signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS then the change is applied

Emits: SignalOrigin, Argv=[Object instance, new origin]

func (*CObject) SetTextDirection 

func (o *CObject) SetTextDirection(direction TextDirection)

Set the text direction for this Object instance. This method emits a text-direction signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the change is applied

Emit: SignalTextDirection, Argv=[Object instance, new text direction]

type CRange 

type CRange struct {
	CWidget
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CRange structure implements the Range interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Range objects

func (*CRange) GetAdjustment 

func (r *CRange) GetAdjustment() (adjustment *CAdjustment)

Get the Adjustment which is the "model" object for Range. See SetAdjustment for details. The return value does not have a reference added, so should not be unreferenced. Returns: 

a Adjustment.
[transfer none]

func (*CRange) GetFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) GetFillLevel() (value float64)

Gets the current position of the fill level indicator. Returns: 

The current fill level

func (*CRange) GetFlippable 

func (r *CRange) GetFlippable() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetFlippable. Returns: 

TRUE if the range is flippable

func (*CRange) GetIncrements 

func (r *CRange) GetIncrements() (step int, page int)

Gets the step and page sizes for the range. 

The step size is used when the user clicks the Scrollbar
arrows or moves Scale via arrow keys. The page size
is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.

Returns: 

step	step size
page	page size

func (*CRange) GetInverted 

func (r *CRange) GetInverted() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetInverted. Returns: 

TRUE if the range is inverted

func (*CRange) GetLowerStepperSensitivity 

func (r *CRange) GetLowerStepperSensitivity() (value SensitivityType)

Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'lower' end of the Range's adjustment. Returns: 

The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.

func (*CRange) GetMinSliderLength 

func (r *CRange) GetMinSliderLength() (length int)

This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. See SetMinSliderLength(). Returns: 

The minimum size of the range's slider.

func (*CRange) GetMinSliderSize 

func (r *CRange) GetMinSliderSize() (value int)

This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. See SetMinSliderSize. Returns: 

The minimum size of the range's slider.

func (*CRange) GetRange 

func (r *CRange) GetRange() (min, max int)

Sets the allowable values in the Range, and clamps the range 

value to be between min
 and max
. (If the range has a non-zero
page size, it is clamped between min
 and max
 - page-size.)

Parameters: 

min	minimum range value
max	maximum range value

func (*CRange) GetRangeRect 

func (r *CRange) GetRangeRect(rangeRect cdk.Rectangle)

This function returns the area that contains the range's trough and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates. This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. Parameters: 

rangeRect	return location for the range rectangle.

func (*CRange) GetRestrictToFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) GetRestrictToFillLevel() (value bool)

Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level. Returns: 

TRUE if range is restricted to the fill level.

func (*CRange) GetRoundDigits 

func (r *CRange) GetRoundDigits() (value int)

Gets the number of digits to round the value to when it changes. See “change-value”. Returns: 

the number of digits to round to

func (*CRange) GetShowFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) GetShowFillLevel() (value bool)

Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically. Returns: 

TRUE if range shows the fill level.

func (*CRange) GetSliderLength 

func (r *CRange) GetSliderLength() (length int)

Returns the length of the scrollbar or scale thumb. Flags: Read

func (*CRange) GetSliderRange 

func (r *CRange) GetSliderRange(sliderStart int, sliderEnd int)

This function returns sliders range along the long dimension, in widget->window coordinates. This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. Parameters: 

sliderStart	return location for the slider's

start, or NULL. 

sliderEnd	return location for the slider's

end, or NULL.

func (*CRange) GetSliderSizeFixed 

func (r *CRange) GetSliderSizeFixed() (value bool)

This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. See SetSliderSizeFixed. Returns: 

whether the range's slider has a fixed size.

func (*CRange) GetStepperSize 

func (r *CRange) GetStepperSize() (size int)

Length of step buttons at ends. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 1

func (*CRange) GetStepperSpacing 

func (r *CRange) GetStepperSpacing() (spacing int)

The spacing between the stepper buttons and thumb. Note that setting this value to anything > 0 will automatically set the trough-under-steppers style property to TRUE as well. Also, stepper-spacing won't have any effect if there are no steppers. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

func (*CRange) GetTroughUnderSteppers 

func (r *CRange) GetTroughUnderSteppers() (underSteppers bool)

Whether to draw the trough across the full length of the range or to exclude the steppers and their spacing. Note that setting the stepper-spacing style property to any value > 0 will automatically enable trough-under-steppers too. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE Flags: Run Last

func (*CRange) GetUpperStepperSensitivity 

func (r *CRange) GetUpperStepperSensitivity() (value SensitivityType)

Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'upper' end of the Range's adjustment. Returns: 

The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.

func (*CRange) GetValue 

func (r *CRange) GetValue() (value int)

Gets the current value of the range. Returns: 

current value of the range.

func (*CRange) Init 

func (r *CRange) Init() (already bool)

Range object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Range instance

func (*CRange) SetFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) SetFillLevel(fillLevel float64)

Set the new position of the fill level indicator. The "fill level" is probably best described by its most prominent use case, which is an indicator for the amount of pre-buffering in a streaming media player. In that use case, the value of the range would indicate the current play position, and the fill level would be the position up to which the file/stream has been downloaded. This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range's trough and is themeable separately from the trough. To enable fill level display, use SetShowFillLevel. The range defaults to not showing the fill level. Additionally, it's possible to restrict the range's slider position to values which are smaller than the fill level. This is controller by SetRestrictToFillLevel and is by default enabled. Parameters: 

fillLevel	the new position of the fill level indicator

func (*CRange) SetFlippable 

func (r *CRange) SetFlippable(flippable bool)

If a range is flippable, it will switch its direction if it is horizontal and its direction is GTK_TEXT_DIR_RTL. See WidgetGetDirection. Parameters: 

flippable	TRUE to make the range flippable

func (*CRange) SetIncrements 

func (r *CRange) SetIncrements(step int, page int)

Sets the step and page sizes for the range. The step size is used when the user clicks the Scrollbar arrows or moves Scale via arrow keys. The page size is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys. Parameters: 

step	step size
page	page size

func (*CRange) SetInverted 

func (r *CRange) SetInverted(setting bool)

Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than on the bottom or left. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to invert the range

func (*CRange) SetLowerStepperSensitivity 

func (r *CRange) SetLowerStepperSensitivity(sensitivity SensitivityType)

Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'lower' end of the Range's adjustment. Parameters: 

sensitivity	the lower stepper's sensitivity policy.

func (*CRange) SetMinSliderLength 

func (r *CRange) SetMinSliderLength(length int)

Sets the minimum size of the range's slider. This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. Parameters: 

minSize	The slider's minimum size

func (*CRange) SetMinSliderSize 

func (r *CRange) SetMinSliderSize(minSize bool)

Sets the minimum size of the range's slider. This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. Parameters: 

minSize	The slider's minimum size

func (*CRange) SetRange 

func (r *CRange) SetRange(min, max int)

Sets the allowable values in the Range, and clamps the range value to be between min and max . (If the range has a non-zero page size, it is clamped between min and max - page-size.) Parameters: 

min	minimum range value
max	maximum range value

func (*CRange) SetRestrictToFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) SetRestrictToFillLevel(restrictToFillLevel bool)

Sets whether the slider is restricted to the fill level. See SetFillLevel for a general description of the fill level concept. Parameters: 

restrictToFillLevel	Whether the fill level restricts slider movement.

func (*CRange) SetRoundDigits 

func (r *CRange) SetRoundDigits(roundDigits int)

Sets the number of digits to round the value to when it changes. See “change-value”. Parameters: 

roundDigits	the precision in digits, or -1

func (*CRange) SetShowFillLevel 

func (r *CRange) SetShowFillLevel(showFillLevel bool)

Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough. See SetFillLevel for a general description of the fill level concept. Parameters: 

showFillLevel	Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.

func (*CRange) SetSliderLength 

func (r *CRange) SetSliderLength(length int)

Set the length of the scrollbar or scale thumb. Sets fixed slider length to 

true. Set to -1 for variable slider length.

Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 14

func (*CRange) SetSliderSizeFixed 

func (r *CRange) SetSliderSizeFixed(sizeFixed bool)

Sets whether the range's slider has a fixed size, or a size that depends on it's adjustment's page size. This function is useful mainly for Range subclasses. Parameters: 

sizeFixed	TRUE to make the slider size constant

func (*CRange) SetStepperSize 

func (r *CRange) SetStepperSize(size int)

Length of step buttons at ends. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 1

func (*CRange) SetStepperSpacing 

func (r *CRange) SetStepperSpacing(spacing int)

The spacing between the stepper buttons and thumb. Note that setting this value to anything > 0 will automatically set the trough-under-steppers style property to TRUE as well. Also, stepper-spacing won't have any effect if there are no steppers. Flags: Read Allowed values: >= 0 Default value: 0

func (*CRange) SetTroughUnderSteppers 

func (r *CRange) SetTroughUnderSteppers(underSteppers bool)

Whether to draw the trough across the full length of the range or to exclude the steppers and their spacing. Note that setting the stepper-spacing style property to any value > 0 will automatically enable trough-under-steppers too. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE Flags: Run Last

func (*CRange) SetUpperStepperSensitivity 

func (r *CRange) SetUpperStepperSensitivity(sensitivity SensitivityType)

Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the 'upper' end of the Range's adjustment. Parameters: 

sensitivity	the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.

func (*CRange) SetValue 

func (r *CRange) SetValue(value int)

Sets the current value of the range; if the value is outside the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside them. The range emits the “value-changed” signal if the value changes. Parameters: 

value	new value of the range

type CRcStyle 

type CRcStyle struct {
}

type CScrollbar 

type CScrollbar struct {
	CRange
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CScrollbar structure implements the Scrollbar interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Scrollbar objects

func (*CScrollbar) Backward 

func (s *CScrollbar) Backward(step int) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) BackwardPage 

func (s *CScrollbar) BackwardPage() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) BackwardStep 

func (s *CScrollbar) BackwardStep() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) CancelEvent 

func (s *CScrollbar) CancelEvent()

func (*CScrollbar) Changed 

func (s *CScrollbar) Changed()

func (*CScrollbar) Draw 

func (s *CScrollbar) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) Forward 

func (s *CScrollbar) Forward(step int) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) ForwardPage 

func (s *CScrollbar) ForwardPage() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) ForwardStep 

func (s *CScrollbar) ForwardStep() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) GetAllStepperRegions 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetAllStepperRegions() (fwd, bwd, sFwd, sBwd cdk.Region)

func (*CScrollbar) GetHasBackwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetHasBackwardStepper() (hasBackwardStepper bool)

Display the standard backward arrow button. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE

func (*CScrollbar) GetHasForwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetHasForwardStepper() (hasForwardStepper bool)

Display the standard forward arrow button. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE

func (*CScrollbar) GetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper() (hasSecondaryBackwardStepper bool)

Display a second backward arrow button on the opposite end of the scrollbar. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

func (*CScrollbar) GetHasSecondaryForwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetHasSecondaryForwardStepper() (hasSecondaryForwardStepper bool)

Display a second forward arrow button on the opposite end of the scrollbar. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

func (*CScrollbar) GetSizeRequest 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

func (*CScrollbar) GetSliderRegion 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetSliderRegion() (region cdk.Region)

func (*CScrollbar) GetStepperRegions 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetStepperRegions() (start, end cdk.Region)

func (*CScrollbar) GetTroughRegion 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetTroughRegion() (region cdk.Region)

func (*CScrollbar) GetWidgetAt 

func (s *CScrollbar) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

func (*CScrollbar) GrabFocus 

func (s *CScrollbar) GrabFocus()

If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CScrollbar) Init 

func (s *CScrollbar) Init() (already bool)

Scrollbar object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Scrollbar instance

func (*CScrollbar) Invalidate 

func (s *CScrollbar) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) ProcessEvent 

func (s *CScrollbar) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) ProcessEventAtPoint 

func (s *CScrollbar) ProcessEventAtPoint(p *cdk.Point2I, e *cdk.EventMouse) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) Resize 

func (s *CScrollbar) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrollbar) SetHasBackwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) SetHasBackwardStepper(hasBackwardStepper bool)

Display the standard backward arrow button. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE

func (*CScrollbar) SetHasForwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) SetHasForwardStepper(hasForwardStepper bool)

Display the standard forward arrow button. Flags: Read Default value: TRUE

func (*CScrollbar) SetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) SetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper(hasSecondaryBackwardStepper bool)

Display a second backward arrow button on the opposite end of the scrollbar. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

func (*CScrollbar) SetHasSecondaryForwardStepper 

func (s *CScrollbar) SetHasSecondaryForwardStepper(hasSecondaryForwardStepper bool)

Display a second forward arrow button on the opposite end of the scrollbar. Flags: Read Default value: FALSE

func (*CScrollbar) ValueChanged 

func (s *CScrollbar) ValueChanged()

type CScrolledViewport 

type CScrolledViewport struct {
	CViewport
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

func MakeScrolledViewport 

func MakeScrolledViewport() *CScrolledViewport

func NewScrolledViewport 

func NewScrolledViewport() *CScrolledViewport

func (*CScrolledViewport) Add 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Add(w Widget)

func (*CScrolledViewport) AddWithViewport 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) AddWithViewport(child Widget)

Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use ContainerAdd instead of this function. The viewport scrolls the child by moving its Window, and takes the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel Window. This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling; for example, if you add a widget such as TreeView with a viewport, the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus, widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the Viewport proxy. A widget supports scrolling natively if the set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in WidgetClass is non-zero, i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier. Parameters: 

child   the widget you want to scroll

func (*CScrolledViewport) Build 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CScrolledViewport) CancelEvent 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) CancelEvent()

func (*CScrolledViewport) Draw 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetChild 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetChild() Widget

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetHAdjustment 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetHAdjustment() (value Adjustment)

Returns the horizontal scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the horizontal scrollbar to the child widget's horizontal scroll functionality. Returns: 

the horizontal Adjustment.
[transfer none]

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetHScrollbar 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetHScrollbar() *CHScrollbar

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetPlacement 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetPlacement() (value CornerType)

Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars for the scrolled window. See SetPlacement. Returns: 

the current placement value.
See also SetPlacement and
UnsetPlacement.

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetPolicy 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetPolicy() (hScrollbarPolicy PolicyType, vScrollbarPolicy PolicyType)

Retrieves the current policy values for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars. See SetPolicy. Parameters: 

hScrollbarPolicy        location to store the policy

for the horizontal scrollbar, or NULL. 

vScrollbarPolicy        location to store the policy

for the vertical scrollbar, or NULL.

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetRegions 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetRegions() (c, h, v cdk.Region)

Returns a CDK Region for each of the viewport child space, horizontal and vertical scrollbar spaces.

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetShadowType 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetShadowType() (value ShadowType)

Gets the shadow type of the scrolled window. See SetShadowType. Returns: 

the current shadow type

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetVAdjustment 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetVAdjustment() (value Adjustment)

Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the vertical scrollbar to the child widget's vertical scroll functionality. Returns: 

the vertical Adjustment.
[transfer none]

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetVScrollbar 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetVScrollbar() *CVScrollbar

func (*CScrolledViewport) GetWidgetAt 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

func (*CScrolledViewport) GrabFocus 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) GrabFocus()

If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CScrolledViewport) Hide 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Hide()

func (*CScrolledViewport) HorizontalShowByPolicy 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) HorizontalShowByPolicy() (show bool)

func (*CScrolledViewport) Init 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Init() (already bool)

func (*CScrolledViewport) InternalGetWidgetAt 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) InternalGetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

func (*CScrolledViewport) Invalidate 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrolledViewport) ProcessEvent 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrolledViewport) ProcessEventAtPoint 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) ProcessEventAtPoint(p *cdk.Point2I, evt *cdk.EventMouse) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrolledViewport) Remove 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Remove(w Widget)

func (*CScrolledViewport) Resize 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetHAdjustment 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetHAdjustment(hAdjustment *CAdjustment)

Sets the Adjustment for the horizontal scrollbar. Parameters: 

hAdjustment     horizontal scroll adjustment

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetPlacement 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetPlacement(windowPlacement CornerType)

Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars for the scrolled window. The default is GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right. Other values in CornerType are GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT, GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT. See also GetPlacement and UnsetPlacement. Parameters: 

windowPlacement position of the child window

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetPolicy 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetPolicy(hScrollbarPolicy PolicyType, vScrollbarPolicy PolicyType)

Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars. The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value from the PolicyType enumeration. If GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the scrollbar is always present; if GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is never present; if GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller than the trough - the display is larger than the page size). Parameters: 

hScrollbarPolicy        policy for horizontal bar
vScrollbarPolicy        policy for vertical bar

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetShadowType 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetShadowType(t ShadowType)

Changes the type of shadow drawn around the contents of scrolled_window . Parameters: 

type    kind of shadow to draw around scrolled window contents

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetTheme 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)

func (*CScrolledViewport) SetVAdjustment 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) SetVAdjustment(vAdjustment *CAdjustment)

Sets the Adjustment for the vertical scrollbar. Parameters: 

vAdjustment     vertical scroll adjustment

func (*CScrolledViewport) Show 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) Show()

func (*CScrolledViewport) UnsetPlacement 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) UnsetPlacement()

Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled window, it obeys the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" XSETTING. See also SetPlacement and GetPlacement.

func (*CScrolledViewport) VerticalShowByPolicy 

func (s *CScrolledViewport) VerticalShowByPolicy() (show bool)

type CStyle 

type CStyle struct {
	CObject
}

The CStyle structure implements the Style interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Style objects

func MakeStyle 

func MakeStyle() *CStyle

Default constructor for Style objects

func NewStyle 

func NewStyle() (value *CStyle)

Constructor for Style objects

func (*CStyle) ApplyDefaultBackground 

func (s *CStyle) ApplyDefaultBackground(window Window, setBg bool, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Parameters: 

area	.

func (*CStyle) Attach 

func (s *CStyle) Attach(window Window) (value Style)

Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the colors and creates the GC's for the style - it specializes it to a particular visual and colormap. The process may involve the creation of a new style if the style has already been attached to a window with a different style and colormap. Since this function may return a new object, you have to use it in the following way: style = Attach (style, window) Parameters: 

window	a Window.

Returns: 

Either style , or a newly-created Style. If the style is
newly created, the style parameter will be unref'ed, and the
new style will have a reference count belonging to the caller.

func (*CStyle) Copy 

func (s *CStyle) Copy() (value Style)

Creates a copy of the passed in Style object. Returns: 

a copy of style .
[transfer full]

func (*CStyle) Detach 

func (s *CStyle) Detach()

Detaches a style from a window. If the style is not attached to any windows anymore, it is unrealized. See Attach.

func (*CStyle) GetStyleProperty 

func (s *CStyle) GetStyleProperty(widgetType cdk.CTypeTag, propertyName string) (value interface{})

Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a widget class is in the given style. Parameters: 

widgetType	the GType of a descendant of Widget
propertyName	the name of the style property to get
value	a GValue where the value of the property being

queried will be stored

func (*CStyle) Init 

func (s *CStyle) Init() (already bool)

Style object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Style instance

func (*CStyle) LookupColor 

func (s *CStyle) LookupColor(colorName string, color cdk.Color) (value bool)

Looks up color_name in the style's logical color mappings, filling in color and returning TRUE if found, otherwise returning FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because it depends on the Style and might change when a theme switch occurs. Parameters: 

colorName	the name of the logical color to look up
color	the Color to fill in.

Returns: 

TRUE if the mapping was found.

func (*CStyle) PaintArrow 

func (s *CStyle) PaintArrow(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, arrowType ArrowType, fill bool, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on window using the given parameters. arrow_type determines the direction of the arrow. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
arrowType	the type of arrow to draw
fill	TRUE if the arrow tip should be filled
x	x origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
y	y origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
width	width of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
height	height of the rectangle to draw the arrow in

func (*CStyle) PaintBox 

func (s *CStyle) PaintBox(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a box on window with the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the box
y	y origin of the box
width	the width of the box
height	the height of the box

func (*CStyle) PaintBoxGap 

func (s *CStyle) PaintBoxGap(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType, gapX int, gapWidth int)

Draws a box in window using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a gap in one side. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle
y	y origin of the rectangle
width	width of the rectangle
height	width of the rectangle
gapSide	side in which to leave the gap
gapX	starting position of the gap
gapWidth	width of the gap

func (*CStyle) PaintCheck 

func (s *CStyle) PaintCheck(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on window with the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
y	y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
width	the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
height	the height of the rectangle to draw the check in

func (*CStyle) PaintDiamond 

func (s *CStyle) PaintDiamond(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on window using the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
y	y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
width	width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
height	height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in

func (*CStyle) PaintExpander 

func (s *CStyle) PaintExpander(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, expanderStyle ExpanderStyle)

Draws an expander as used in TreeView. x and y specify the center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the "expander-size" style property of widget . (If widget is not specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't have sufficient information to position the expander, this is likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the expanded position. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	the x position to draw the expander at
y	the y position to draw the expander at
expanderStyle	the style to draw the expander in; determines

whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an intermediate state.

func (*CStyle) PaintExtension 

func (s *CStyle) PaintExtension(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType)

Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the extension
y	y origin of the extension
width	width of the extension
height	width of the extension
gapSide	the side on to which the extension is attached

func (*CStyle) PaintFlatBox 

func (s *CStyle) PaintFlatBox(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a flat box on window with the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the box
y	y origin of the box
width	the width of the box
height	the height of the box

func (*CStyle) PaintFocus 

func (s *CStyle) PaintFocus(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on window using the given style. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
y	the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
width	the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
height	the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator

func (*CStyle) PaintHandle 

func (s *CStyle) PaintHandle(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, orientation cdk.Orientation)

Draws a handle as used in HandleBox and Paned. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the handle
y	y origin of the handle
width	with of the handle
height	height of the handle
orientation	the orientation of the handle

func (*CStyle) PaintOption 

func (s *CStyle) PaintOption(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle on window with the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
y	y origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
width	the width of the rectangle to draw the option in
height	the height of the rectangle to draw the option in

func (*CStyle) PaintPolygon 

func (s *CStyle) PaintPolygon(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, points []cdk.Point2I, nPoints int, fill bool)

Draws a polygon on window with the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
points	an array of Points
nPoints	length of points

fill	TRUE if the polygon should be filled

func (*CStyle) PaintResizeGrip 

func (s *CStyle) PaintResizeGrip(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, edge WindowEdge, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on window using the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
edge	the edge in which to draw the resize grip
x	the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
y	the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
width	the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
height	the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip

func (*CStyle) PaintShadow 

func (s *CStyle) PaintShadow(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in window using the given style and state and shadow type. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle
y	y origin of the rectangle
width	width of the rectangle
height	width of the rectangle

func (*CStyle) PaintShadowGap 

func (s *CStyle) PaintShadowGap(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType, gapX int, gapWidth int)

Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in window using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a gap in one side. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle
y	y origin of the rectangle
width	width of the rectangle
height	width of the rectangle
gapSide	side in which to leave the gap
gapX	starting position of the gap
gapWidth	width of the gap

func (*CStyle) PaintSlider 

func (s *CStyle) PaintSlider(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, orientation cdk.Orientation)

Draws a slider in the given rectangle on window using the given style and orientation. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	a shadow
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
y	the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
width	the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
height	the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
orientation	the orientation to be used

func (*CStyle) PaintSpinner 

func (s *CStyle) PaintSpinner(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, step int, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws a spinner on window using the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget (may be NULL).
detail	a style detail (may be NULL).
step	the nth step, a value between 0 and “num-steps”
x	the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
y	the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
width	the width of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
height	the height of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner

func (*CStyle) PaintTab 

func (s *CStyle) PaintTab(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)

Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows) in the given rectangle on window using the given parameters. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
shadowType	the type of shadow to draw
area	clip rectangle, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
x	x origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
y	y origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
width	the width of the rectangle to draw the tab in
height	the height of the rectangle to draw the tab in

func (*CStyle) PaintVLine 

func (s *CStyle) PaintVLine(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, y1 int, y2 int, x int)

Draws a vertical line from (x , y1_ ) to (x , y2_ ) in window using the given style and state. Parameters: 

window	a Window
stateType	a state
area	rectangle to which the output is clipped, or NULL if the

output should not be clipped. 

widget	the widget.
detail	a style detail.
y1	the starting y coordinate
y2	the ending y coordinate
x	the x coordinate

type CTreeExpanderStyle 

type CTreeExpanderStyle uint64

Tree expander style 

const (
	CTREE_EXPANDER_NONE CTreeExpanderStyle = iota
	CTREE_EXPANDER_SQUARE
	CTREE_EXPANDER_TRIANGLE
	CTREE_EXPANDER_CIRCULAR
)

type CTreeExpansionType 

type CTreeExpansionType uint64

Tree expansion type 

const (
	CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND CTreeExpansionType = iota
	CTREE_EXPANSION_EXPAND_RECURSIVE
	CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE
	CTREE_EXPANSION_COLLAPSE_RECURSIVE
	CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE
	CTREE_EXPANSION_TOGGLE_RECURSIVE
)

type CTreeLineStyle 

type CTreeLineStyle uint64

Tree line style 

const (
	CTREE_LINES_NONE CTreeLineStyle = iota
	CTREE_LINES_SOLID
	CTREE_LINES_DOTTED
	CTREE_LINES_TABBED
)

type CTreePos 

type CTreePos uint64

Tree pos 

const (
	CTREE_POS_BEFORE CTreePos = iota
	CTREE_POS_AS_CHILD
	CTREE_POS_AFTER
)

type CVBox 

type CVBox struct {
	CBox
}

func MakeVBox 

func MakeVBox() *CVBox

func NewVBox 

func NewVBox(homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CVBox

func (*CVBox) Init 

func (b *CVBox) Init() bool

type CVButtonBox 

type CVButtonBox struct {
	CButtonBox
}

func MakeVButtonBox 

func MakeVButtonBox() *CVButtonBox

func NewVButtonBox 

func NewVButtonBox(homogeneous bool, spacing int) *CVButtonBox

func (*CVButtonBox) Init 

func (b *CVButtonBox) Init() bool

type CVScrollbar 

type CVScrollbar struct {
	CScrollbar
}

func MakeVScrollbar 

func MakeVScrollbar() *CVScrollbar

func NewVScrollbar 

func NewVScrollbar() *CVScrollbar

func (*CVScrollbar) Init 

func (v *CVScrollbar) Init() (already bool)

type CViewport 

type CViewport struct {
	CBin
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CViewport structure implements the Viewport interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Viewport objects

func MakeViewport 

func MakeViewport() *CViewport

Default constructor for Viewport objects

func NewViewport 

func NewViewport(hAdjustment, vAdjustment *CAdjustment) *CViewport

func (*CViewport) Draw 

func (v *CViewport) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CViewport) GetBinWindow 

func (v *CViewport) GetBinWindow() (value Window)

Gets the bin window of the Viewport. Returns: 

a Window.
[transfer none]

func (*CViewport) GetHAdjustment 

func (v *CViewport) GetHAdjustment() (adjustment *CAdjustment)

Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport. Returns: 

the horizontal adjustment of viewport .
[transfer none]

func (*CViewport) GetShadowType 

func (v *CViewport) GetShadowType() (shadowType ShadowType)

Gets the shadow type of the Viewport. See SetShadowType. Returns: 

the shadow type

func (*CViewport) GetVAdjustment 

func (v *CViewport) GetVAdjustment() (adjustment *CAdjustment)

Returns the vertical adjustment of the viewport. Returns: 

the vertical adjustment of viewport .
[transfer none]

func (*CViewport) GetViewWindow 

func (v *CViewport) GetViewWindow() (value Window)

Gets the view window of the Viewport. Returns: 

a Window.
[transfer none]

func (*CViewport) Init 

func (v *CViewport) Init() (already bool)

Viewport object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Viewport instance

func (*CViewport) Invalidate 

func (v *CViewport) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CViewport) Resize 

func (v *CViewport) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CViewport) SetHAdjustment 

func (v *CViewport) SetHAdjustment(adjustment *CAdjustment)

Sets the horizontal adjustment of the viewport. Parameters: 

adjustment	a Adjustment.

func (*CViewport) SetShadowType 

func (v *CViewport) SetShadowType(shadowType ShadowType)

Sets the shadow type of the viewport. Parameters: 

type	the new shadow type.

func (*CViewport) SetVAdjustment 

func (v *CViewport) SetVAdjustment(adjustment *CAdjustment)

Sets the vertical adjustment of the viewport. Parameters: 

adjustment	a Adjustment.

type CWidget 

type CWidget struct {
	CObject
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CWidget structure implements the Widget interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with CTK objects

func (*CWidget) Activate 

func (w *CWidget) Activate() (value bool)

For widgets that can be "activated" (buttons, menu items, etc.) this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If widget isn't activatable, the function returns FALSE. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget was activatable

func (*CWidget) AddAccelerator 

func (w *CWidget) AddAccelerator(accelSignal string, accelGroup AccelGroup, accelKey int, accelMods ModifierType, accelFlags AccelFlags)

Installs an accelerator for this widget in accel_group that causes accel_signal to be emitted if the accelerator is activated. The accel_group needs to be added to the widget's toplevel via WindowAddAccelGroup, and the signal must be of type G_RUN_ACTION. Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the user, use AccelMapAddEntry and SetAccelPath or MenuItemSetAccelPath instead. Parameters: 

widget	widget to install an accelerator on
accelSignal	widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
accelGroup	accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
accelKey	GDK keyval of the accelerator
accelMods	modifier key combination of the accelerator
accelFlags	flag accelerators, e.g. GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE

func (*CWidget) AddEvents 

func (w *CWidget) AddEvents(events cdk.EventMask)

Adds the events in the bitfield events to the event mask for widget . See SetEvents for details. Parameters: 

events	an event mask, see EventMask

func (*CWidget) AddMnemonicLabel 

func (w *CWidget) AddMnemonicLabel(label Widget)

Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for this widget. (See ListMnemonicLabels). Note the list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection to the “destroy” signal or a weak notifier.

func (*CWidget) CanActivateAccel 

func (w *CWidget) CanActivateAccel(signalId int) (value bool)

Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal identified by signal_id can currently be activated. This is done by emitting the “can-activate-accel” signal on widget ; if the signal isn't overridden by a handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all its ancestors mapped. Parameters: 

signalId	the ID of a signal installed on widget

Returns: 

TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.

func (*CWidget) CanDefault 

func (w *CWidget) CanDefault() bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance IsSensitive() and the CAN_DEFAULT flag is set, returns FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) CanFocus 

func (w *CWidget) CanFocus() bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance has the CAN_FOCUS flag, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) ChildFocus 

func (w *CWidget) ChildFocus(direction DirectionType) (value bool)

This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're writing an app, you'd use GrabFocus to move the focus to a particular widget, and ContainerSetFocusChain to change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those functions instead. ChildFocus is called by containers as the user moves around the window using keyboard shortcuts. direction indicates what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab forward, tab backward). ChildFocus emits the “focus” signal; widgets override the default handler for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior. The default ::focus handler for a widget should return TRUE if moving in direction left the focus on a focusable location inside that widget, and FALSE if moving in direction moved the focus outside the widget. If returning TRUE, widgets normally call GrabFocus to place the focus accordingly; if returning FALSE, they don't modify the current focus location. This function replaces ContainerFocus from CTK 1.2. It was necessary to check that the child was visible, sensitive, and focusable before calling ContainerFocus. ChildFocus returns FALSE if the widget is not currently in a focusable state, so there's no need for those checks. Parameters: 

direction	direction of focus movement

Returns: 

TRUE if focus ended up inside widget

func (*CWidget) ChildNotify 

func (w *CWidget) ChildNotify(childProperty string)

Emits a “child-notify” signal for the on widget . This is the analogue of g_object_notify for child properties. Parameters: 

childProperty	the name of a child property installed on the

class of widget 's parent

func (*CWidget) ClassPath 

func (w *CWidget) ClassPath(pathLength int, path string, pathReversed string)

Same as Path, but always uses the name of a widget's type, never uses a custom name set with SetName. Parameters: 

pathLength	location to store the length of the class path, or NULL.
path	location to store the class path as an allocated string, or NULL.
pathReversed	location to store the reverse class path as an allocated

string, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) Destroy 

func (w *CWidget) Destroy()

Destroys a widget. Equivalent to ObjectDestroy, except that you don't have to cast the widget to Object. When a widget is destroyed, it will break any references it holds to other objects. If the widget is inside a container, the widget will be removed from the container. If the widget is a toplevel (derived from Window), it will be removed from the list of toplevels, and the reference CTK holds to it will be removed. Removing a widget from its container or the list of toplevels results in the widget being finalized, unless you've added additional references to the widget with g_object_ref. In most cases, only toplevel widgets (windows) require explicit destruction, because when you destroy a toplevel its children will be destroyed as well.

func (*CWidget) Destroyed 

func (w *CWidget) Destroyed(widgetPointer Widget)

This function sets *widget_pointer to NULL if widget_pointer != NULL. It's intended to be used as a callback connected to the "destroy" signal of a widget. You connect Destroyed as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will be set to NULL. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies of the same dialog. Parameters: 

widgetPointer	address of a variable that contains widget

.

func (*CWidget) EnsureStyle 

func (w *CWidget) EnsureStyle()

Ensures that widget has a style (widget->style ). Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.

func (*CWidget) ErrorBell 

func (w *CWidget) ErrorBell()

Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget. If the “gtk-error-bell” setting is TRUE, it calls WindowBeep, otherwise it does nothing. Note that the effect of WindowBeep can be configured in many ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment or window manager that is used.

func (*CWidget) Event 

func (w *CWidget) Event(event cdk.Event) (value bool)

Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit the event signals on a widget (those signals should never be emitted without using this function to do so). If you want to synthesize an event though, don't use this function; instead, use MainDoEvent so the event will behave as if it were in the event queue. Don't synthesize expose events; instead, use WindowInvalidateRect to invalidate a region of the window. Parameters: 

event	a Event

Returns: 

return from the event signal emission (TRUE if the event was
handled)

func (*CWidget) FreezeChildNotify 

func (w *CWidget) FreezeChildNotify()

Stops emission of “child-notify” signals on widget . The signals are queued until ThawChildNotify is called on widget . This is the analogue of g_object_freeze_notify for child properties.

func (*CWidget) GetAncestor 

func (w *CWidget) GetAncestor(widgetType cdk.CTypeTag) (value Widget)

Gets the first ancestor of widget with type widget_type . For example, GetAncestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX) gets the first Box that's an ancestor of widget . No reference will be added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note about checking for a toplevel Window in the docs for GetToplevel. Note that unlike IsAncestor, GetAncestor considers widget to be an ancestor of itself. Parameters: 

widgetType	ancestor type

Returns: 

the ancestor widget, or NULL if not found.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetAppPaintable 

func (w *CWidget) GetAppPaintable() (value bool)

Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in an “expose-event” handler. See SetAppPaintable Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is app paintable

func (*CWidget) GetCanDefault 

func (w *CWidget) GetCanDefault() (value bool)

Determines whether widget can be a default widget. See SetCanDefault. Returns: 

TRUE if widget can be a default widget, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetCanFocus 

func (w *CWidget) GetCanFocus() (value bool)

Determines whether widget can own the input focus. See SetCanFocus. Returns: 

TRUE if widget can own the input focus, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetChildVisible 

func (w *CWidget) GetChildVisible() (value bool)

Gets the value set with SetChildVisible. If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably needs reorganization. This function is only useful for container implementations and never should be called by an application. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.

func (*CWidget) GetColormap 

func (w *CWidget) GetColormap() (value cdk.Colormap)

Gets the colormap that will be used to render widget . No reference will be added to the returned colormap; it should not be unreferenced. Returns: 

the colormap used by widget .
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetCompositeName 

func (w *CWidget) GetCompositeName() (value string)

Obtains the composite name of a widget. Returns: 

the composite name of widget , or NULL if widget is not a
composite child. The string should be freed when it is no
longer needed.

func (*CWidget) GetDefaultColormap 

func (w *CWidget) GetDefaultColormap() (value cdk.Colormap)

Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets. Returns: 

default widget colormap.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetDefaultDirection 

func (w *CWidget) GetDefaultDirection() (value TextDirection)

Obtains the current default reading direction. See SetDefaultDirection. Returns: 

the current default direction.

func (*CWidget) GetDefaultStyle 

func (w *CWidget) GetDefaultStyle() (value Style)

Returns the default style used by all widgets initially. Returns: 

the default style. This Style object is owned by CTK and
should not be modified or freed.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetDefaultVisual 

func (w *CWidget) GetDefaultVisual() (value cdk.Visual)

Obtains the visual of the default colormap. Not really useful; used to be useful before ColormapGetVisual existed. Returns: 

visual of the default colormap.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetDirection 

func (w *CWidget) GetDirection() (value TextDirection)

Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See SetDirection. Returns: 

the reading direction for the widget.

func (*CWidget) GetDisplay 

func (w *CWidget) GetDisplay() (value cdk.DisplayManager)

Get the Display for the toplevel window associated with this widget. This function can only be called after the widget has been added to a widget hierarchy with a Window at the top. In general, you should only create display specific resources when a widget has been realized, and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized. Returns: 

the Display for the toplevel for this widget.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetDoubleBuffered 

func (w *CWidget) GetDoubleBuffered() (value bool)

Determines whether the widget is double buffered. See SetDoubleBuffered Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is double buffered

func (*CWidget) GetEvents 

func (w *CWidget) GetEvents() (value cdk.EventMask)

Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags from the EventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget will receive. Returns: 

event mask for widget

func (*CWidget) GetFlags 

func (w *CWidget) GetFlags() WidgetFlags

Returns the current flags for the Widget instance

func (*CWidget) GetHasTooltip 

func (w *CWidget) GetHasTooltip() (value bool)

Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See Widget:has-tooltip for more information. Returns: 

current value of has-tooltip on widget .

func (*CWidget) GetHasWindow 

func (w *CWidget) GetHasWindow() (value bool)

Determines whether widget has a Window of its own. See SetHasWindow. Returns: 

TRUE if widget has a window, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetMapped 

func (w *CWidget) GetMapped() (value bool)

Whether the widget is mapped. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is mapped, FALSE otherwise.

func (*CWidget) GetModifierStyle 

func (w *CWidget) GetModifierStyle() (value RcStyle)

Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by ModifyStyle.) If no style has previously set, a new RcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc style, you must call ModifyStyle, passing in the returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect. Caution: passing the style back to ModifyStyle will normally end up destroying it, because ModifyStyle copies the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style, thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive. Returns: 

the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is owned by
the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this around,
you must add a refcount using g_object_ref.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetName 

func (w *CWidget) GetName() (value string)

Retrieves the name of a widget. See SetName for the significance of widget names. Returns: 

name of the widget. This string is owned by CTK and should not
be modified or freed

func (*CWidget) GetNoShowAll 

func (w *CWidget) GetNoShowAll() (value bool)

Returns the current value of the Widget:no-show-all property, which determines whether calls to ShowAll and HideAll will affect this widget. Returns: 

the current value of the "no-show-all" property.

func (*CWidget) GetParent 

func (w *CWidget) GetParent() (value Container)

Returns the parent container of widget . Returns: 

the parent container of widget , or NULL.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetParentWindow 

func (w *CWidget) GetParentWindow() (value Window)

Gets widget 's parent window. Returns: 

the parent window of widget .
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetPointer 

func (w *CWidget) GetPointer(x int, y int)

Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates. Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are defined as widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets, and are relative to widget->allocation.x , widget->allocation.y for widgets that are GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets. Parameters: 

x	return location for the X coordinate, or NULL.
y	return location for the Y coordinate, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) GetRealized 

func (w *CWidget) GetRealized() (value bool)

Determines whether widget is realized. Returns: 

TRUE if widget is realized, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetReceivesDefault 

func (w *CWidget) GetReceivesDefault() (value bool)

Determines whether widget is alyways treated as default widget withing its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget is the default. See SetReceivesDefault. Returns: 

TRUE if widget acts as default widget when focussed, FALSE
otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetRootWindow 

func (w *CWidget) GetRootWindow() (value Window)

Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can only be called after the widget has been added to a widget hierarchy with Window at the top. The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup Window associated with the window. In general, you should only create display specific resources when a widget has been realized, and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized. Returns: 

the Window root window for the toplevel for this widget.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetScreen 

func (w *CWidget) GetScreen() (value cdk.Display)

Get the Screen from the toplevel window associated with this widget. This function can only be called after the widget has been added to a widget hierarchy with a Window at the top. In general, you should only create screen specific resources when a widget has been realized, and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized. Returns: 

the Screen for the toplevel for this widget.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetSensitive 

func (w *CWidget) GetSensitive() (value bool)

Returns the widget's sensitivity (in the sense of returning the value that has been set using SetSensitive). The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its own and its parent widget's sensitivity. See IsSensitive. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is sensitive

func (*CWidget) GetSizeRequest 

func (w *CWidget) GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)

Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using SetSizeRequest. A value of -1 stored in width or height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See SetSizeRequest. To get the size a widget will actually use, call SizeRequest instead of this function. Parameters: 

width	return location for width, or NULL.
height	return location for height, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) GetSnapshot 

func (w *CWidget) GetSnapshot(clipRect cdk.Rectangle) (value cdk.Pixmap)

Create a Pixmap of the contents of the widget and its children. Works even if the widget is obscured. The depth and visual of the resulting pixmap is dependent on the widget being snapshot and likely differs from those of a target widget displaying the pixmap. The function PixbufGetFromDrawable can be used to convert the pixmap to a visual independant representation. The snapshot area used by this function is the widget 's allocation plus any extra space occupied by additional windows belonging to this widget (such as the arrows of a spin button). Thus, the resulting snapshot pixmap is possibly larger than the allocation. If clip_rect is non-NULL, the resulting pixmap is shrunken to match the specified clip_rect. The (x,y) coordinates of clip_rect are interpreted widget relative. If width or height of clip_rect are 0 or negative, the width or height of the resulting pixmap will be shrunken by the respective amount. For instance a clip_rect { +5, +5, -10, -10 } will chop off 5 pixels at each side of the snapshot pixmap. If non-NULL, clip_rect will contain the exact widget-relative snapshot coordinates upon return. A clip_rect of { -1, -1, 0, 0 } can be used to preserve the auto-grown snapshot area and use clip_rect as a pure output parameter. The returned pixmap can be NULL, if the resulting clip_area was empty. Parameters: 

clipRect	a Rectangle or NULL.

Returns: 

Pixmap snapshot of the widget

func (*CWidget) GetState 

func (w *CWidget) GetState() (value StateType)

Returns the widget's state. See SetState. Returns: 

the state of the widget.

func (*CWidget) GetStyle 

func (w *CWidget) GetStyle() (value Style)

Simply an accessor function that returns widget->style . Returns: 

the widget's Style.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetThemeRequest 

func (w *CWidget) GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)

Returns the current theme, adjusted for Widget focus and accounting for any PARENT_SENSITIVE conditions. This method is primarily useful in drawable Widget types during the Invalidate() and Draw() stages of the Widget lifecycle

func (*CWidget) GetTooltipMarkup 

func (w *CWidget) GetTooltipMarkup() (value string)

Gets the contents of the tooltip for widget . Returns: 

the tooltip text, or NULL. You should free the returned string
with g_free when done.

func (*CWidget) GetTooltipText 

func (w *CWidget) GetTooltipText() (value string)

Gets the contents of the tooltip for widget . Returns: 

the tooltip text, or NULL. You should free the returned string
with g_free when done.

func (*CWidget) GetTooltipWindow 

func (w *CWidget) GetTooltipWindow() (value Window)

Returns the Window of the current tooltip. This can be the Window created by default, or the custom tooltip window set using SetTooltipWindow. Returns: 

The Window of the current tooltip.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetTopParent 

func (w *CWidget) GetTopParent() (parent Container)

Returns the top-most parent in the Widget instance's parent hierarchy. Returns nil if the Widget has no parent container

func (*CWidget) GetToplevel 

func (w *CWidget) GetToplevel() (value Widget)

This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy widget is a part of. If widget has no parent widgets, it will be returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. Note the difference in behavior vs. GetAncestor; GetAncestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW) would return NULL if widget wasn't inside a toplevel window, and if the window was inside a Window-derived widget which was in turn inside the toplevel Window. While the second case may seem unlikely, it actually happens when a Plug is embedded inside a Socket within the same application. To reliably find the toplevel Window, use GetToplevel and check if the TOPLEVEL flags is set on the result. Returns: 

the topmost ancestor of widget , or widget itself if there's no
ancestor.
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetVisible 

func (w *CWidget) GetVisible() (value bool)

Determines whether the widget is visible. Note that this doesn't take into account whether the widget's parent is also visible or the widget is obscured in any way. See SetVisible. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is visible

func (*CWidget) GetVisual 

func (w *CWidget) GetVisual() (value cdk.Visual)

Gets the visual that will be used to render widget . Returns: 

the visual for widget .
[transfer none]

func (*CWidget) GetWidgetAt 

func (w *CWidget) GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget

A wrapper around the Object.GetObjectAt() method, only returning Widget instance types or nil otherwise

func (*CWidget) GetWindow 

func (w *CWidget) GetWindow() (window Window)

Returns the widget's window if it is realized, NULL otherwise Returns: 

widget 's window.
[transfer none]

Returns the Window instance associated with this Widget instance, nil otherwise

func (*CWidget) GrabDefault 

func (w *CWidget) GrabDefault()

Causes widget to become the default widget. widget must have the GTK_CAN_DEFAULT flag set; typically you have to set this flag yourself by calling SetCanDefault (widget , TRUE). The default widget is activated when the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be activatable, that is, Activate should affect them.

func (*CWidget) GrabEventFocus 

func (w *CWidget) GrabEventFocus()

func (*CWidget) GrabFocus 

func (w *CWidget) GrabFocus()

Causes widget to have the keyboard focus for the Window it's inside. widget must be a focusable widget, such as a Entry; something like Frame won't work. More precisely, it must have the GTK_CAN_FOCUS flag set. Use SetCanFocus to modify that flag. The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget will likely fail and cause critical warnings. If the Widget instance CanFocus() then take the focus of the associated Window. Any previously focused Widget will emit a lost-focus signal and the newly focused Widget will emit a gained-focus signal. This method emits a grab-focus signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied

Emits: SignalGrabFocus, Argv=[Widget instance] Emits: SignalLostFocus, Argv=[Previous focus Widget instance], From=Previous focus Widget instance Emits: SignalGainedFocus, Argv=[Widget instance, previous focus Widget instance]

func (*CWidget) GtkCallback 

func (w *CWidget) GtkCallback(data interface{})

The type of the callback functions used for e.g. iterating over the children of a container, see ContainerForeach. Parameters: 

widget	the widget to operate on
data	user-supplied data

func (*CWidget) HasDefault 

func (w *CWidget) HasDefault() (value bool)

Determines whether widget is the current default widget within its toplevel. See SetCanDefault. Returns: 

TRUE if widget is the current default widget within its
toplevel, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) HasEventFocus 

func (w *CWidget) HasEventFocus() bool

func (*CWidget) HasFlags 

func (w *CWidget) HasFlags(f WidgetFlags) bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance has the given flag, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) HasFocus 

func (w *CWidget) HasFocus() (value bool)

Determines if the widget has the global input focus. See IsFocus for the difference between having the global input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.

func (*CWidget) HasGrab 

func (w *CWidget) HasGrab() (value bool)

Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse). See also GrabAdd. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack

func (*CWidget) HasRcStyle 

func (w *CWidget) HasRcStyle() (value bool)

Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism. Returns: 

TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc mechanism,
FALSE otherwise.

func (*CWidget) HasScreen 

func (w *CWidget) HasScreen() (value bool)

Checks whether there is a Screen is associated with this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel window at the top. Returns: 

TRUE if there is a Screen associcated with the widget.

func (*CWidget) HasState 

func (w *CWidget) HasState(s StateType) bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget has the given StateType, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) Hide 

func (w *CWidget) Hide()

Reverses the effects of Show, causing the widget to be hidden (invisible to the user).

func (*CWidget) HideOnDelete 

func (w *CWidget) HideOnDelete() (value bool)

Utility function; intended to be connected to the “delete-event” signal on a Window. The function calls Hide on its argument, then returns TRUE. If connected to ::delete-event, the result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy the window. By default, CTK destroys windows when ::delete-event is received. Returns: 

TRUE

func (*CWidget) Init 

func (w *CWidget) Init() (already bool)

CTK widget initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Widget instance

func (*CWidget) Intersect 

func (w *CWidget) Intersect(area cdk.Rectangle, intersection cdk.Rectangle) (value bool)

Computes the intersection of a widget 's area and area , storing the intersection in intersection , and returns TRUE if there was an intersection. intersection may be NULL if you're only interested in whether there was an intersection. Parameters: 

area	a rectangle
intersection	rectangle to store intersection of widget

and area

Returns: 

TRUE if there was an intersection

func (*CWidget) IsAncestor 

func (w *CWidget) IsAncestor(ancestor Widget) (value bool)

Determines whether widget is somewhere inside ancestor , possibly with intermediate containers. Returns: 

TRUE if ancestor contains widget as a child, grandchild, great
grandchild, etc.

func (*CWidget) IsComposited 

func (w *CWidget) IsComposited() (value bool)

Whether widget can rely on having its alpha channel drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a compositing manager is running for widget 's screen. Please note that the semantics of this call will change in the future if used on a widget that has a composited window in its hierarchy (as set by WindowSetComposited). Returns: 

TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn
correctly.

func (*CWidget) IsDefault 

func (w *CWidget) IsDefault() bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance CanDefault() and the HAS_DEFAULT flag is set, returns FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) IsDrawable 

func (w *CWidget) IsDrawable() (value bool)

Determines whether widget can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn to if it is mapped and visible. Returns: 

TRUE if widget is drawable, FALSE otherwise

Returns TRUE if the APP_PAINTABLE flag is set, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) IsFocus 

func (w *CWidget) IsFocus() (value bool)

Determines if the widget is the focus widget within its toplevel. (This does not mean that the HAS_FOCUS flag is necessarily set; HAS_FOCUS will only be set if the toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.) Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance is currently the focus of it's parent Window, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) IsFocused 

func (w *CWidget) IsFocused() bool

Returns TRUE if the Widget instance or it's parent are the current focus of the associated Window

func (*CWidget) IsParentFocused 

func (w *CWidget) IsParentFocused() bool

If the Widget instance is PARENT_SENSITIVE and one of it's parents are the focus for the associated Window, return TRUE and FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) IsSensitive 

func (w *CWidget) IsSensitive() bool

Returns the widget's effective sensitivity, which means it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive Returns: 

TRUE if the widget is effectively sensitive

func (*CWidget) IsToplevel 

func (w *CWidget) IsToplevel() (value bool)

Determines whether widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only Window and Invisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent widget. Returns: 

TRUE if widget is a toplevel, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) IsVisible 

func (w *CWidget) IsVisible() bool

Returns TRUE if the VISIBLE flag is set, FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) KeynavFailed 

func (w *CWidget) KeynavFailed(direction DirectionType) (value bool)

This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the “keynav-failed” signal on the widget and its return value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of ChildFocus: When TRUE is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard navigation is Ok and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the focus to. When FALSE is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling ChildFocus on the widget's toplevel. The default ::keynav-failed handler returns TRUE for GTK_DIR_TAB_FORWARD and GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD. For the other values of DirectionType, it looks at the “gtk-keynav-cursor-only” setting and returns FALSE if the setting is TRUE. This way the entire user interface becomes cursor-navigatable on input devices such as mobile phones which only have cursor keys but no tab key. Whenever the default handler returns TRUE, it also calls ErrorBell to notify the user of the failed keyboard navigation. A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of Entry widgets where the user should be able to navigate the entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces that require entering license keys. Parameters: 

direction	direction of focus movement

Returns: 

TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, FALSE if the
emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard navigation
attempt in its parent container(s).

func (*CWidget) ListAccelClosures 

func (w *CWidget) ListAccelClosures() (value cdk.CList)

Lists the closures used by widget for accelerator group connections with AccelGroupConnectByPath or AccelGroupConnect. The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on widget , by connecting to the AccelGroup ::accel-changed signal of the AccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with AccelGroupFromAccelClosure. Parameters: 

widget	widget to list accelerator closures for

Returns: 

a newly allocated cdk.CList of closures.
[transfer container][element-type GClosure]

func (*CWidget) ListMnemonicLabels 

func (w *CWidget) ListMnemonicLabels() (value cdk.CList)

Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for which this widget is a the target of a mnemonic (see for example, LabelSetMnemonicWidget). The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you must call g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL) first, and then unref all the widgets afterwards. Returns: 

the list of mnemonic labels; free this list with g_list_free
when you are done with it.
[element-type Widget][transfer container]

func (*CWidget) Map 

func (w *CWidget) Map()

This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes a widget to be mapped if it isn't already.

func (*CWidget) ModifyBase 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyBase(state StateType, color cdk.Color)

Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state. All other style values are left untouched. The base color is the background color used along with the text color (see ModifyText) for widgets such as Entry and TextView. See also ModifyStyle. Note that "no window" widgets (which have the GTK_NO_WINDOW flag set) draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g. Label. To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the base color on their parent; if you want to set the background of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in a EventBox widget and setting the base color on that. Parameters: 

state	the state for which to set the base color
color	the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),

or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyBase.

func (*CWidget) ModifyBg 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyBg(state StateType, color cdk.Color)

Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state. All other style values are left untouched. See also ModifyStyle. Note that "no window" widgets (which have the GTK_NO_WINDOW flag set) draw on their parent container's window and thus may not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g. Label. To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the background color on their parent; if you want to set the background of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in a EventBox widget and setting the background color on that. Parameters: 

state	the state for which to set the background color
color	the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),

or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyBg.

func (*CWidget) ModifyCursor 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyCursor(primary cdk.Color, secondary cdk.Color)

Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the “cursor-color” and “secondary-cursor-color” style properties. All other style values are left untouched. See also ModifyStyle. Parameters: 

primary	the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be

allocated), or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyCursor. 

secondary	the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be

allocated), or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyCursor.

func (*CWidget) ModifyFg 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyFg(state StateType, color cdk.Color)

Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state. All other style values are left untouched. See also ModifyStyle. Parameters: 

state	the state for which to set the foreground color
color	the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),

or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyFg.

func (*CWidget) ModifyStyle 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyStyle(style RcStyle)

Modifies style values on the widget. Modifications made using this technique take precedence over style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overriden if a style is explicitely set on the widget using SetStyle. The RcStyle structure is designed so each field can either be set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some style values and leave the others unchanged. Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative with previous calls to ModifyStyle or with such functions as ModifyFg. If you wish to retain previous values, you must first call GetModifierStyle, make your modifications to the returned style, then call ModifyStyle with that style. On the other hand, if you first call ModifyStyle, subsequent calls to such functions ModifyFg will have a cumulative effect with the initial modifications. Parameters: 

style	the RcStyle holding the style modifications

func (*CWidget) ModifyText 

func (w *CWidget) ModifyText(state StateType, color cdk.Color)

Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state. All other style values are left untouched. The text color is the foreground color used along with the base color (see ModifyBase) for widgets such as Entry and TextView. See also ModifyStyle. Parameters: 

state	the state for which to set the text color
color	the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),

or NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to of ModifyText.

func (*CWidget) Path 

func (w *CWidget) Path() (path string)

Obtains the full path to widget . The path is simply the name of a widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by periods. The name of a widget comes from GetName. Paths are used to apply styles to a widget in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the widget by default (e.g. "Button") or can be set to an application-specific value with SetName. By setting the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc file. path_reversed_p fills in the path in reverse order, i.e. starting with widget 's name instead of starting with the name of widget 's outermost ancestor. Parameters: 

pathLength	location to store length of the path, or NULL.
path	location to store allocated path string, or NULL.
pathReversed	location to store allocated reverse path string, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) PopColormap 

func (w *CWidget) PopColormap()

Removes a colormap pushed with PushColormap.

func (*CWidget) PopCompositeChild 

func (w *CWidget) PopCompositeChild()

Cancels the effect of a previous call to PushCompositeChild.

func (*CWidget) PushColormap 

func (w *CWidget) PushColormap(cmap cdk.Colormap)

Pushes cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets. Remove cmap with PopColormap. There's little reason to use this function. Parameters: 

cmap	a Colormap

func (*CWidget) PushCompositeChild 

func (w *CWidget) PushCompositeChild()

Makes all newly-created widgets as composite children until the corresponding PopCompositeChild call. A composite child is a child that's an implementation detail of the container it's inside and should not be visible to people using the container. Composite children aren't treated differently by GTK (but see ContainerForeach vs. ContainerForall), but e.g. GUI builders might want to treat them in a different way. Here is a simple example:

func (*CWidget) QueueDraw 

func (w *CWidget) QueueDraw()

Equivalent to calling QueueDrawArea for the entire area of a widget.

func (*CWidget) QueueDrawArea 

func (w *CWidget) QueueDrawArea(x int, y int, width int, height int)

Invalidates the rectangular area of widget defined by x , y , width and height by calling WindowInvalidateRect on the widget's window and all its child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been invalidated. Normally you would only use this function in widget implementations. You might also use it, or WindowInvalidateRect directly, to schedule a redraw of a DrawingArea or some portion thereof. Frequently you can just call WindowInvalidateRect or WindowInvalidateRegion instead of this function. Those functions will invalidate only a single window, instead of the widget and all its children. The advantage of adding to the invalidated region compared to simply drawing immediately is efficiency; using an invalid region ensures that you only have to redraw one time. Parameters: 

x	x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
y	y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
width	width of region to draw
height	height of region to draw

func (*CWidget) QueueResizeNoRedraw 

func (w *CWidget) QueueResizeNoRedraw()

This function works like QueueResize, except that the widget is not invalidated.

func (*CWidget) Realize 

func (w *CWidget) Realize()

Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a widget. For example, widget->window will be created when a widget is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be realized and mapped automatically. Realizing a widget requires all the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling Realize realizes the widget's parents in addition to widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window when you realize it, bad things will happen. This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be called after the widget is realized automatically, such as Widget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect to the Widget::realize signal.

func (*CWidget) RegionIntersect 

func (w *CWidget) RegionIntersect(region cdk.Region) (value cdk.Region)

Computes the intersection of a widget 's area and region , returning the intersection. The result may be empty, use RegionEmpty to check. Parameters: 

region	a Region, in the same coordinate system as

widget->allocation . That is, relative to widget->window for NO_WINDOW widgets; relative to the parent window of widget->window for widgets with their own window. 

returns	A newly allocated region holding the intersection of widget

and region . The coordinates of the return value are relative to widget->window for NO_WINDOW widgets, and relative to the parent window of widget->window for widgets with their own window.

func (*CWidget) ReleaseEventFocus 

func (w *CWidget) ReleaseEventFocus()

func (*CWidget) RemoveAccelerator 

func (w *CWidget) RemoveAccelerator(accelGroup AccelGroup, accelKey int, accelMods ModifierType) (value bool)

Removes an accelerator from widget , previously installed with AddAccelerator. Parameters: 

widget	widget to install an accelerator on
accelGroup	accel group for this widget
accelKey	GDK keyval of the accelerator
accelMods	modifier key combination of the accelerator
returns	whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed

func (*CWidget) RemoveMnemonicLabel 

func (w *CWidget) RemoveMnemonicLabel(label Widget)

Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for this widget. (See ListMnemonicLabels). The widget must have previously been added to the list with AddMnemonicLabel.

func (*CWidget) Reparent 

func (w *CWidget) Reparent(parent Container)

Move the Widget to the given container, removing itself first from any other container that was currently holding it. This method emits a reparent signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PAS, the change is applied Parameters: 

newParent	a Container to move the widget into

Emits: SignalReparent, Argv=[Widget instance, new parent]

func (*CWidget) ResetRcStyles 

func (w *CWidget) ResetRcStyles()

Reset the styles of widget and all descendents, so when they are looked up again, they get the correct values for the currently loaded RC file settings. This function is not useful for applications.

func (*CWidget) SendExpose 

func (w *CWidget) SendExpose(event cdk.Event) (value int)

Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not normally used directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose event to a child NO_WINDOW widget, and that is normally done using ContainerPropagateExpose. If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn, use WindowInvalidateRect or WindowInvalidateRegion. To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call with a call to WindowProcessUpdates. Parameters: 

event	a expose Event

Returns: 

return from the event signal emission (TRUE if the event was
handled)

func (*CWidget) SendFocusChange 

func (w *CWidget) SendFocusChange(event cdk.Event) (value bool)

Sends the focus change event to widget This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it should be used is when it is necessary for a Widget to assign focus to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating window similar to the quick search in TreeView. An example of its usage is: Parameters: 

event	a Event of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE

Returns: 

the return value from the event signal emission: TRUE if the
event was handled, and FALSE otherwise

func (*CWidget) SetAccelPath 

func (w *CWidget) SetAccelPath(accelPath string, accelGroup AccelGroup)

Given an accelerator group, accel_group , and an accelerator path, accel_path , sets up an accelerator in accel_group so whenever the key binding that is defined for accel_path is pressed, widget will be activated. This removes any accelerators (for any accelerator group) installed by previous calls to SetAccelPath. Associating accelerators with paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications to be saved for future use. (See AccelMapSave.) This function is a low level function that would most likely be used by a menu creation system like UIManager. If you use UIManager, setting up accelerator paths will be done automatically. Even when you you aren't using UIManager, if you only want to set up accelerators on menu items MenuItemSetAccelPath provides a somewhat more convenient interface. Note that accel_path string will be stored in a GQuark. Therefore, if you pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with g_intern_static_string. Parameters: 

accelPath	path used to look up the accelerator.
accelGroup	a AccelGroup.

func (*CWidget) SetAppPaintable 

func (w *CWidget) SetAppPaintable(appPaintable bool)

Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in an “expose-event” handler. This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of the CTK core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets that do pay attention to the flag, such as EventBox and Window, the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background. Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped. If this is not suitable (e.g. because you want to make a transparent window using an RGBA visual), you can work around this by doing: Parameters: 

appPaintable	TRUE if the application will paint on the widget

func (*CWidget) SetCanDefault 

func (w *CWidget) SetCanDefault(canDefault bool)

Specifies whether widget can be a default widget. See GrabDefault for details about the meaning of "default". Parameters: 

canDefault	whether or not widget

can be a default widget.

func (*CWidget) SetCanFocus 

func (w *CWidget) SetCanFocus(canFocus bool)

Specifies whether widget can own the input focus. See GrabFocus for actually setting the input focus on a widget. Parameters: 

canFocus	whether or not widget

can own the input focus.

func (*CWidget) SetChildVisible 

func (w *CWidget) SetChildVisible(isVisible bool)

Sets whether widget should be mapped along with its when its parent is mapped and widget has been shown with Show. The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to a container with SetParent, to avoid mapping children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However it will be reset to its default state of TRUE when the widget is removed from a container. Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container can queue a resize itself. This function is only useful for container implementations and never should be called by an application. Parameters: 

isVisible	if TRUE, widget

should be mapped along with its parent.

func (*CWidget) SetColormap 

func (w *CWidget) SetColormap(colormap cdk.Colormap)

Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not have been previously realized. This probably should only be used from an init function (i.e. from the constructor for the widget). Parameters: 

colormap	a colormap

func (*CWidget) SetCompositeName 

func (w *CWidget) SetCompositeName(name string)

Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be a composite child of its parent; see PushCompositeChild. Parameters: 

name	the name to set

func (*CWidget) SetDefaultColormap 

func (w *CWidget) SetDefaultColormap(colormap cdk.Colormap)

Sets the default colormap to use when creating widgets. PushColormap is a better function to use if you only want to affect a few widgets, rather than all widgets. Parameters: 

colormap	a Colormap

func (*CWidget) SetDefaultDirection 

func (w *CWidget) SetDefaultDirection(dir TextDirection)

Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the direction has not been explicitly set by SetDirection. Parameters: 

dir	the new default direction. This cannot be

GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.

func (*CWidget) SetDirection 

func (w *CWidget) SetDirection(dir TextDirection)

Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction controls the primary direction for widgets containing text, and also the direction in which the children of a container are packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will let the default reading direction present, except for containers where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification). If the direction is set to GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value set by SetDefaultDirection will be used. Parameters: 

dir	the new direction

func (*CWidget) SetDoubleBuffered 

func (w *CWidget) SetDoubleBuffered(doubleBuffered bool)

Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function to turn off the buffering. "Double buffered" simply means that WindowBeginPaintRegion and WindowEndPaint are called automatically around expose events sent to the widget. WindowBeginPaint diverts all drawing to a widget's window to an offscreen buffer, and WindowEndPaint draws the buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window update in one smooth step, and don't see individual graphics primitives being rendered. In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don't flicker, so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing. Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in WindowBeginPaint). Parameters: 

doubleBuffered	TRUE to double-buffer a widget

func (*CWidget) SetEvents 

func (w *CWidget) SetEvents(events cdk.EventMask)

Sets the event mask (see EventMask) for a widget. The event mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality, so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is unrealized. Consider AddEvents for widgets that are already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event mask. This function can't be used with GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets; to get events on those widgets, place them inside a EventBox and receive events on the event box. Parameters: 

events	event mask

func (*CWidget) SetFlags 

func (w *CWidget) SetFlags(v WidgetFlags)

Sets the given flags on the Widget instance. This method emits a set-flags signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the change is applied

Emits: SignalSetFlags, Argv=[Widget instance, given flags to set]

func (*CWidget) SetHasTooltip 

func (w *CWidget) SetHasTooltip(hasTooltip bool)

Sets the has-tooltip property on widget to has_tooltip . See Widget:has-tooltip for more information. Parameters: 

hasTooltip	whether or not widget

has a tooltip.

func (*CWidget) SetHasWindow 

func (w *CWidget) SetHasWindow(hasWindow bool)

Specifies whether widget has a Window of its own. Note that all realized widgets have a non-NULL "window" pointer (GetWindow never returns a NULL window when a widget is realized), but for many of them it's actually the Window of one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a window for themselves in Widget::realize must announce this by calling this function with has_window = FALSE. This function should only be called by widget implementations, and they should call it in their init function. Parameters: 

hasWindow	whether or not widget

has a window.

func (*CWidget) SetMapped 

func (w *CWidget) SetMapped(mapped bool)

Marks the widget as being realized. This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's "map" or "unmap" implementation. Parameters: 

mapped	TRUE to mark the widget as mapped

func (*CWidget) SetName 

func (w *CWidget) SetName(name string)

Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a gtkrc file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name in the gtkrc file. See the documentation for gtkrc files (on the same page as the docs for RcStyle). Note that widget names are separated by periods in paths (see Path), so names with embedded periods may cause confusion. Parameters: 

name	name for the widget

func (*CWidget) SetNoShowAll 

func (w *CWidget) SetNoShowAll(noShowAll bool)

Sets the “no-show-all” property, which determines whether calls to ShowAll and HideAll will affect this widget. This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally controlled visibility, see UIManager. Parameters: 

noShowAll	the new value for the "no-show-all" property

func (*CWidget) SetParent 

func (w *CWidget) SetParent(parent Container)

This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of Container. Sets the container as the parent of widget , and takes care of some details such as updating the state and style of the child to reflect its new location. The opposite function is Unparent. Parameters: 

parent	parent container

func (*CWidget) SetParentWindow 

func (w *CWidget) SetParentWindow(parentWindow Window)

Sets a non default parent window for widget . Parameters: 

parentWindow	the new parent window.

func (*CWidget) SetRealized 

func (w *CWidget) SetRealized(realized bool)

Marks the widget as being realized. This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's "realize" or "unrealize" implementation. Parameters: 

realized	TRUE to mark the widget as realized

func (*CWidget) SetReceivesDefault 

func (w *CWidget) SetReceivesDefault(receivesDefault bool)

Specifies whether widget will be treated as the default widget within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget is the default. See GrabDefault for details about the meaning of "default". Parameters: 

receivesDefault	whether or not widget

can be a default widget.

func (*CWidget) SetRedrawOnAllocate 

func (w *CWidget) SetRedrawOnAllocate(redrawOnAllocate bool)

Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size allocation changes. By default, this setting is TRUE and the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this setting off will improve performance. Note that for NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to FALSE turns off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a NO_WINDOW widget that does draw on widget->window , you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating regions newly when the widget increases size. Parameters: 

redrawOnAllocate	if TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn

when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the new portion of the widget will be redrawn.

func (*CWidget) SetScrollAdjustments 

func (w *CWidget) SetScrollAdjustments(hadjustment Adjustment, vadjustment Adjustment) (value bool)

For widgets that support scrolling, sets the scroll adjustments and returns TRUE. For widgets that don't support scrolling, does nothing and returns FALSE. Widgets that don't support scrolling can be scrolled by placing them in a Viewport, which does support scrolling. Parameters: 

hadjustment	an adjustment for horizontal scrolling, or NULL.
vadjustment	an adjustment for vertical scrolling, or NULL.

Returns: 

TRUE if the widget supports scrolling

func (*CWidget) SetSensitive 

func (w *CWidget) SetSensitive(sensitive bool)

Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are "grayed out" and the user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as "inactive", "disabled", or "ghosted" in some other toolkits. Parameters: 

sensitive	TRUE to make the widget sensitive

Emits: SignalSetSensitive, Argv=[Widget instance, given sensitive bool]

func (*CWidget) SetSizeRequest 

func (w *CWidget) SetSizeRequest(width, height int)

Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget's size request will be width by height . You can use this function to force a widget to be either larger or smaller than it normally would be. In most cases, WindowSetDefaultSize is a better choice for toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size request. When dealing with window sizes, WindowSetGeometryHints can be a useful function as well. Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes, translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be correct. The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly. However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more space than it requested. If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then the "natural" size request of the widget will be used instead. Widgets can't actually be allocated a size less than 1 by 1, but you can pass 0,0 to this function to mean "as small as possible." Parameters: 

width	width widget should request, or -1 to unset
height	height widget should request, or -1 to unset

Emits: SignalSetSizeRequest, Argv=[Widget instance, given size]

func (*CWidget) SetState 

func (w *CWidget) SetState(state StateType)

This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set the state using wrapper functions such as SetSensitive. Parameters: 

state	new state for widget

Adds the given state bitmask to the Widget instance. This method emits a set-state signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the change is applied

Emit: SignalSetState, Argv=[Widget instance, given state to set]

func (*CWidget) SetStyle 

func (w *CWidget) SetStyle(style Style)

Sets the Style for a widget (widget->style ). You probably don't want to use this function; it interacts badly with themes, because themes work by replacing the Style. Instead, use ModifyStyle. Parameters: 

style	a Style, or NULL to remove the effect of a previous

SetStyle and go back to the default style.

func (*CWidget) SetTheme 

func (w *CWidget) SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)

Set the Theme for the Widget instance. This will also refresh the requested theme. A request theme is a transient theme, based on the actually set theme and adjusted for focus. If the given theme is equivalent to the current theme then no action is taken. After verifying that the given theme is different, this method emits a set-theme signal and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the changes are applied and the Widget.Invalidate() method is called

func (*CWidget) SetTooltipMarkup 

func (w *CWidget) SetTooltipMarkup(markup string)

Sets markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with the Tango text markup language. This function will take care of setting Widget:has-tooltip to TRUE and of the default handler for the Widget::query-tooltip signal. See also the Widget:tooltip-markup property and TooltipSetMarkup. Parameters: 

markup	the contents of the tooltip for widget

, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) SetTooltipText 

func (w *CWidget) SetTooltipText(text string)

Sets text as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take care of setting Widget:has-tooltip to TRUE and of the default handler for the Widget::query-tooltip signal. See also the Widget:tooltip-text property and TooltipSetText. Parameters: 

text	the contents of the tooltip for widget

func (*CWidget) SetTooltipWindow 

func (w *CWidget) SetTooltipWindow(customWindow Window)

Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying tooltips with custom_window . CTK will take care of showing and hiding custom_window at the right moment, to behave likewise as the default tooltip window. If custom_window is NULL, the default tooltip window will be used. If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to have the name "gtk-tooltip", see SetName. Parameters: 

customWindow	a Window, or NULL.

func (*CWidget) SetVisible 

func (w *CWidget) SetVisible(visible bool)

Sets the visibility state of widget . Note that setting this to TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see GetVisible. This function simply calls Show or Hide but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on some condition. Parameters: 

visible	whether the widget should be shown or not

func (*CWidget) SetWindow 

func (w *CWidget) SetWindow(window Window)

Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a widget's Widget::realize implementation. The window passed is usually either new window created with WindowNew, or the window of its parent widget as returned by GetParentWindow. Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own Window by calling SetHasWindow. This is usually done in the widget's init function. Parameters: 

window	a Window

Emits: SignalSetWindow, Argv=[Widget instance, given window]

func (*CWidget) Show 

func (w *CWidget) Show()

Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a container, it's easier to call ShowAll on the container, instead of individually showing the widgets. Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget, in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen. When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their toplevel container is realized and mapped.

func (*CWidget) ShowAll 

func (w *CWidget) ShowAll()

Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is a container).

func (*CWidget) ShowNow 

func (w *CWidget) ShowNow()

Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget (i.e. a Window that has not yet been shown), enter the main loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful; because the main loop is running, anything can happen during this function.

func (*CWidget) SizeRequest 

func (w *CWidget) SizeRequest() cdk.Rectangle

Returns the currently requested size

func (*CWidget) ThawChildNotify 

func (w *CWidget) ThawChildNotify()

Reverts the effect of a previous call to FreezeChildNotify. This causes all queued “child-notify” signals on widget to be emitted.

func (*CWidget) TranslateCoordinates 

func (w *CWidget) TranslateCoordinates(destWidget Widget, srcX int, srcY int, destX int, destY int) (value bool)

Translate coordinates relative to src_widget 's allocation to coordinates relative to dest_widget 's allocations. In order to perform this operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common toplevel. Parameters: 

srcX	X position relative to src_widget

srcY	Y position relative to src_widget

destX	location to store X position relative to dest_widget

. 

destY	location to store Y position relative to dest_widget

. Returns: 

FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there was no common
ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in *dest_x and
*dest_y . Otherwise TRUE.

func (*CWidget) TriggerTooltipQuery 

func (w *CWidget) TriggerTooltipQuery()

Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of widget is located. See TooltipTriggerTooltipQuery for more information.

func (*CWidget) Unmap 

func (w *CWidget) Unmap()

This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes a widget to be unmapped if it's currently mapped.

func (*CWidget) Unparent 

func (w *CWidget) Unparent()

This function is only for use in widget implementations. Should be called by implementations of the remove method on Container, to dissociate a child from the container.

func (*CWidget) Unrealize 

func (w *CWidget) Unrealize()

This function is only useful in widget implementations. Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources associated with the widget, such as widget->window ).

func (*CWidget) UnsetFlags 

func (w *CWidget) UnsetFlags(v WidgetFlags)

Removes the given flags from the Widget instance. This method emits an unset-flags signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the change is applied

Emits: SignalUnsetFlags, Argv=[Widget instance, given flags to unset]

func (*CWidget) UnsetState 

func (w *CWidget) UnsetState(v StateType)

Removes the given state bitmask from the Widget instance. This method emits an unset-state signal initially and if the listeners return EVENT_PASS, the change is applied

Emit: SignalUnsetState, Argv=[Widget instance, given state to unset]

type CWindow 

type CWindow struct {
	CBin
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The CWindow structure implements the Window interface and is exported to facilitate type embedding with custom implementations. No member variables are exported as the interface methods are the only intended means of interacting with Window objects

func MakeWindow 

func MakeWindow() *CWindow

Default constructor for Window objects

func NewWindow 

func NewWindow() (w *CWindow)

Constructor for Window objects

func NewWindowWithTitle 

func NewWindowWithTitle(title string) (w *CWindow)

Constructor for Window objects

func (*CWindow) ActivateDefault 

func (w *CWindow) ActivateDefault() (value bool)

Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current focused widget has been configured to receive the default action (see WidgetSetReceivesDefault), in which case the focused widget is activated. Returns: 

TRUE if a widget got activated.

func (*CWindow) ActivateFocus 

func (w *CWindow) ActivateFocus() (value bool)

Activates the current focused widget within the window. Returns: 

TRUE if a widget got activated.

func (*CWindow) ActivateKey 

func (w *CWindow) ActivateKey(event cdk.EventKey) (value bool)

Activates mnemonics and accelerators for this Window. This is normally called by the default ::key_press_event handler for toplevel windows, however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window. Parameters: 

event	a EventKey

Returns: 

TRUE if a mnemonic or accelerator was found and activated.

func (*CWindow) AddAccelGroup 

func (w *CWindow) AddAccelGroup(accelGroup AccelGroup)

Associate accel_group with window , such that calling AccelGroupsActivate on window will activate accelerators in accel_group . Parameters: 

window	window to attach accelerator group to
accelGroup	a AccelGroup

func (*CWindow) AddMnemonic 

func (w *CWindow) AddMnemonic(keyval rune, target interface{})

Adds a mnemonic to this window. Parameters: 

keyval	the mnemonic
target	the widget that gets activated by the mnemonic

func (*CWindow) Build 

func (w *CWindow) Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error

func (*CWindow) Deiconify 

func (w *CWindow) Deiconify()

Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified window . Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could iconify it again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run. You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) Draw 

func (w *CWindow) Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CWindow) FocusNext 

func (w *CWindow) FocusNext() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CWindow) FocusPrevious 

func (w *CWindow) FocusPrevious() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CWindow) Fullscreen 

func (w *CWindow) Fullscreen()

Asks to place window in the fullscreen state. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely full screen afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could unfullscreen it again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just don't write code that crashes if not. You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) GetAcceptFocus 

func (w *CWindow) GetAcceptFocus() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetAcceptFocus. Returns: 

TRUE if window should receive the input focus

func (*CWindow) GetDecorated 

func (w *CWindow) GetDecorated() (value bool)

Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations such as a title bar via SetDecorated. Returns: 

TRUE if the window has been set to have decorations

func (*CWindow) GetDefaultSize 

func (w *CWindow) GetDefaultSize(width int, height int)

Gets the default size of the window. A value of -1 for the width or height indicates that a default size has not been explicitly set for that dimension, so the "natural" size of the window will be used. Parameters: 

width	location to store the default width, or NULL.
height	location to store the default height, or NULL.

func (*CWindow) GetDefaultWidget 

func (w *CWindow) GetDefaultWidget() (value Widget)

Returns the default widget for window . See SetDefault for more details. Returns: 

the default widget, or NULL if there is none.
[transfer none]

func (*CWindow) GetDeletable 

func (w *CWindow) GetDeletable() (value bool)

Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button via SetDeletable. Returns: 

TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button

func (*CWindow) GetDestroyWithParent 

func (w *CWindow) GetDestroyWithParent() (value bool)

Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See SetDestroyWithParent. Returns: 

TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.

func (*CWindow) GetDisplayManager 

func (w *CWindow) GetDisplayManager() (dm cdk.DisplayManager)

func (*CWindow) GetEventFocus 

func (w *CWindow) GetEventFocus() (o interface{})

func (*CWindow) GetFocus 

func (w *CWindow) GetFocus() (focus interface{})

Retrieves the current focused widget within the window. Note that this is the widget that would have the focus if the toplevel window focused; if the toplevel window is not focused then WidgetHasFocus (widget) will not be TRUE for the widget. Returns: 

the currently focused widget, or NULL if there is none.
[transfer none]

func (*CWindow) GetFocusOnMap 

func (w *CWindow) GetFocusOnMap() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetFocusOnMap. Returns: 

TRUE if window should receive the input focus when mapped.

func (*CWindow) GetMnemonicModifier 

func (w *CWindow) GetMnemonicModifier() (value cdk.ModMask)

Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See SetMnemonicModifier. Returns: 

the modifier mask used to activate mnemonics on this window.

func (*CWindow) GetMnemonicsVisible 

func (w *CWindow) GetMnemonicsVisible() (value bool)

func (*CWindow) GetModal 

func (w *CWindow) GetModal() (value bool)

Returns whether the window is modal. See SetModal. Returns: 

TRUE if the window is set to be modal and establishes a grab
when shown

func (*CWindow) GetNextFocus 

func (w *CWindow) GetNextFocus() (next interface{})

func (*CWindow) GetOpacity 

func (w *CWindow) GetOpacity() (value float64)

Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See SetOpacity. Returns: 

the requested opacity for this window.

func (*CWindow) GetPosition 

func (w *CWindow) GetPosition(rootX int, rootY int)

This function returns the position you need to pass to Move to keep window in its current position. This means that the meaning of the returned value varies with window gravity. See Move for more details. If you haven't changed the window gravity, its gravity will be GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that GetPosition gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager frame for the window. Move sets the position of this same top-left corner. GetPosition is not 100% reliable because the X Window System does not specify a way to obtain the geometry of the decorations placed on a window by the window manager. Thus CTK is using a "best guess" that works with most window managers. Moreover, nearly all window managers are historically broken with respect to their handling of window gravity. So moving a window to its current position as returned by GetPosition tends to result in moving the window slightly. Window managers are slowly getting better over time. If a window has gravity GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager frame is not relevant, and thus GetPosition will always produce accurate results. However you can't use static gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen, because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations. If you are saving and restoring your application's window positions, you should know that it's impossible for applications to do this without getting it somewhat wrong because applications do not have sufficient knowledge of window manager state. The Correct Mechanism is to support the session management protocol (see the "GnomeClient" object in the GNOME libraries for example) and allow the window manager to save your window sizes and positions. Parameters: 

rootX	return location for X coordinate of gravity-determined reference point.
rootY	return location for Y coordinate of gravity-determined reference point.

func (*CWindow) GetPreviousFocus 

func (w *CWindow) GetPreviousFocus() (previous interface{})

func (*CWindow) GetResizable 

func (w *CWindow) GetResizable() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetResizable. Returns: 

TRUE if the user can resize the window

func (*CWindow) GetRole 

func (w *CWindow) GetRole() (value string)

Returns the role of the window. See SetRole for further explanation. Returns: 

the role of the window if set, or NULL. The returned is owned
by the widget and must not be modified or freed.

func (*CWindow) GetSize 

func (w *CWindow) GetSize() (width, height int)

Obtains the current size of window . If window is not onscreen, it returns the size CTK will suggest to the window manager for the initial window size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window manager will actually select). The size obtained by GetSize is the last size received in a EventConfigure, that is, CTK uses its locally-stored size, rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you call Resize then immediately call GetSize, the size won't have taken effect yet. After the window manager processes the resize request, CTK receives notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and the size of the window gets updated. Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition, because the size of the window may change between the time that you get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to "configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent state to match the size delivered in the EventConfigure. Note 2: The returned size does not include the size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or border). Those are not drawn by CTK and CTK has no reliable method of determining their size. Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred way is to simply set the window's semantic type with SetTypeHint, which allows the window manager to e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of dialogs with SetTransientFor window managers will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's much preferred to let the window manager handle these things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size of the window decorations/border into account, while your application cannot. In any case, if you insist on application-specified window positioning, there's still a better way than doing it yourself - SetPosition will frequently handle the details for you. Parameters: 

width	return location for width, or NULL.
height	return location for height, or NULL.

func (*CWindow) GetSkipPagerHint 

func (w *CWindow) GetSkipPagerHint() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetSkipPagerHint. Returns: 

TRUE if window shouldn't be in pager

func (*CWindow) GetSkipTaskbarHint 

func (w *CWindow) GetSkipTaskbarHint() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetSkipTaskbarHint Returns: 

TRUE if window shouldn't be in taskbar

func (*CWindow) GetThemeRequest 

func (w *CWindow) GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)

func (*CWindow) GetTitle 

func (w *CWindow) GetTitle() (value string)

Retrieves the title of the window. See SetTitle. Returns: 

the title of the window, or NULL if none has been set
explicitely. The returned string is owned by the widget and
must not be modified or freed.

func (*CWindow) GetTransientFor 

func (w *CWindow) GetTransientFor() (value Window)

Fetches the transient parent for this window. See SetTransientFor. Returns: 

the transient parent for this window, or NULL if no transient
parent has been set.
[transfer none]

func (*CWindow) GetUrgencyHint 

func (w *CWindow) GetUrgencyHint() (value bool)

Gets the value set by SetUrgencyHint Returns: 

TRUE if window is urgent

func (*CWindow) GetVBox 

func (w *CWindow) GetVBox() (vbox VBox)

func (*CWindow) HasGroup 

func (w *CWindow) HasGroup() (value bool)

Returns whether window has an explicit window group. Returns: 

TRUE if window has an explicit window group.
Since 2.22

func (*CWindow) HasToplevelFocus 

func (w *CWindow) HasToplevelFocus() (focused bool)

Returns whether the input focus is within this Window. For real toplevel windows, this is identical to IsActive, but for embedded windows, like Plug, the results will differ. Returns: 

TRUE if the input focus is within this Window

func (*CWindow) Iconify 

func (w *CWindow) Iconify()

Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified window . Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely iconified afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could deiconify it again, or there may not be a window manager in which case iconification isn't possible, etc. But normally the window will end up iconified. Just don't write code that crashes if not. It's permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears onscreen. You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) Init 

func (w *CWindow) Init() (already bool)

Window object initialization. This must be called at least once to setup the necessary defaults and allocate any memory structures. Calling this more than once is safe though unnecessary. Only the first call will result in any effect upon the Window instance

func (*CWindow) Invalidate 

func (w *CWindow) Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag

func (*CWindow) IsActive 

func (w *CWindow) IsActive() (active bool)

Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel. (That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.) The return value is TRUE if the window is active toplevel itself, but also if it is, say, a Plug embedded in the active toplevel. You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window. See HasToplevelFocus Returns: 

TRUE if the window part of the current active window.

func (*CWindow) ListTopLevels 

func (w *CWindow) ListTopLevels() (value []Window)

Returns a list of all existing toplevel windows. The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you must call g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL) first, and then unref all the widgets afterwards. Returns: 

list of toplevel widgets.
[element-type Widget][transfer container]

func (*CWindow) Maximize 

func (w *CWindow) Maximize()

Asks to maximize window , so that it becomes full-screen. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely maximized afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could unmaximize it again, and not all window managers support maximization. But normally the window will end up maximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not. It's permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen initially. You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) MnemonicActivate 

func (w *CWindow) MnemonicActivate(keyval rune, modifier cdk.ModMask) (activated bool)

Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic. Parameters: 

keyval	the mnemonic
modifier	the modifiers
returns	TRUE if the activation is done.

func (*CWindow) Move 

func (w *CWindow) Move(x int, y int)

Asks the window manager to move window to the given position. Window managers are free to ignore this; most window managers ignore requests for initial window positions (instead using a user-defined placement algorithm) and honor requests after the window has already been shown. Note: the position is the position of the gravity-determined reference point for the window. The gravity determines two things: first, the location of the reference point in root window coordinates; and second, which point on the window is positioned at the reference point. By default the gravity is GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, so the reference point is simply the x , y supplied to Move. The top-left corner of the window decorations (aka window frame or border) will be placed at x , y . Therefore, to position a window at the top left of the screen, you want to use the default gravity (which is GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST) and move the window to 0,0. To position a window at the bottom right corner of the screen, you would set GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST, which means that the reference point is at x + the window width and y + the window height, and the bottom-right corner of the window border will be placed at that reference point. So, to place a window in the bottom right corner you would first set gravity to south east, then write: Move (window, ScreenWidth - window_width, ScreenHeight - window_height) (note that this example does not take multi-head scenarios into account). The Extended Window Manager Hints specification at http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec has a nice table of gravities in the "implementation notes" section. The GetPosition documentation may also be relevant. Parameters: 

x	X coordinate to move window to
y	Y coordinate to move window to

func (*CWindow) ParseGeometry 

func (w *CWindow) ParseGeometry(geometry string) (value bool)

Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the manual page for X (type 'man X') for details on this. ParseGeometry does work on all CTK ports including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment. If either a size or a position can be extracted from the geometry string, ParseGeometry returns TRUE and calls SetDefaultSize and/or Move to resize/move the window. If ParseGeometry returns TRUE, it will also set the GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints indicating to the window manager that the size/position of the window was user-specified. This causes most window managers to honor the geometry. Note that for ParseGeometry to work as expected, it has to be called when the window has its "final" size, i.e. after calling WidgetShowAll on the contents and SetGeometryHints on the window. Parameters: 

geometry	geometry string

Returns: 

TRUE if string was parsed successfully

func (*CWindow) Present 

func (w *CWindow) Present()

Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent on the user's platform, window manager, and preferences. If window is hidden, this function calls WidgetShow as well. This function should be used when the user tries to open a window that's already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu a second time; use Present to move the already-open dialog where the user can see it. If you are calling this function in response to a user interaction, it is preferable to use PresentWithTime.

func (*CWindow) PresentWithTime 

func (w *CWindow) PresentWithTime(timestamp int)

Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction. If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use Present. See Present for details. Parameters: 

timestamp	the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a

button or key press event) which triggered this call

func (*CWindow) ProcessEvent 

func (w *CWindow) ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag

func (*CWindow) PropagateKeyEvent 

func (w *CWindow) PropagateKeyEvent(event cdk.EventKey) (value bool)

Propagate a key press or release event to the focus widget and up the focus container chain until a widget handles event . This is normally called by the default ::key_press_event and ::key_release_event handlers for toplevel windows, however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window. Parameters: 

event	a EventKey

Returns: 

TRUE if a widget in the focus chain handled the event.

func (*CWindow) RemoveAccelGroup 

func (w *CWindow) RemoveAccelGroup(accelGroup AccelGroup)

Reverses the effects of AddAccelGroup. Parameters: 

accelGroup	a AccelGroup

func (*CWindow) RemoveMnemonic 

func (w *CWindow) RemoveMnemonic(keyval rune, target interface{})

Removes a mnemonic from this window. Parameters: 

keyval	the mnemonic
target	the widget that gets activated by the mnemonic

func (*CWindow) RemoveWidgetMnemonics 

func (w *CWindow) RemoveWidgetMnemonics(target interface{})

Removes all mnemonics from this window for the target Widget. Parameters: 

target	the widget that gets activated by the mnemonic

func (*CWindow) ReshowWithInitialSize 

func (w *CWindow) ReshowWithInitialSize()

Hides window , then reshows it, resetting the default size and position of the window. Used by GUI builders only.

func (*CWindow) Resize 

func (w *CWindow) Resize() cdk.EventFlag

Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry constraints. The default geometry constraint is that windows may not be smaller than their size request; to override this constraint, call WidgetSetSizeRequest to set the window's request to a smaller value. If Resize is called before showing a window for the first time, it overrides any default size set with SetDefaultSize. Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels. Parameters: 

width	width in pixels to resize the window to
height	height in pixels to resize the window to

func (*CWindow) SetAcceptFocus 

func (w *CWindow) SetAcceptFocus(setting bool)

Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive the input focus. This function sets this hint. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to let this window receive input focus

func (*CWindow) SetAutoStartupNotification 

func (w *CWindow) SetAutoStartupNotification(setting bool)

By default, after showing the first Window, CTK calls NotifyStartupComplete. Call this function to disable the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification until after your real main window has been shown, for example. In that example, you would disable startup notification temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that showing the main window would automatically result in notification. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to automatically do startup notification

func (*CWindow) SetDecorated 

func (w *CWindow) SetDecorated(setting bool)

By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize controls, etc. Some window managers allow CTK to disable these decorations, creating a borderless window. If you set the decorated property to FALSE using this function, CTK will do its best to convince the window manager not to decorate the window. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling Show. On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager policy involved. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to decorate the window

func (*CWindow) SetDefault 

func (w *CWindow) SetDefault(defaultWidget Widget)

The default widget is the widget that's activated when the user presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or unsets the default widget for a Window about. When setting (rather than unsetting) the default widget it's generally easier to call WidgetGrabFocus on the widget. Before making a widget the default widget, you must set the GTK_CAN_DEFAULT flag on the widget you'd like to make the default using GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS. Parameters: 

defaultWidget	widget to be the default, or NULL to unset the

default widget for the toplevel.

func (*CWindow) SetDeletable 

func (w *CWindow) SetDeletable(setting bool)

By default, windows have a close button in the window frame. Some disable this button. If you set the deletable property to FALSE using this function, CTK will do its best to convince the window manager not to show a close button. Depending on the system, this function may not have any effect when called on a window that is already visible, so you should call it before calling Show. On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager policy involved. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to decorate the window as deletable

func (*CWindow) SetDestroyWithParent 

func (w *CWindow) SetDestroyWithParent(setting bool)

If setting is TRUE, then destroying the transient parent of window will also destroy window itself. This is useful for dialogs that shouldn't persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they're associated with, for example. Parameters: 

setting	whether to destroy window

with its transient parent

func (*CWindow) SetDisplayManager 

func (w *CWindow) SetDisplayManager(dm cdk.DisplayManager)

func (*CWindow) SetEventFocus 

func (w *CWindow) SetEventFocus(o interface{})

func (*CWindow) SetFocus 

func (w *CWindow) SetFocus(focus interface{})

If focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets it as the focus widget for the window. If focus is NULL, unsets the focus widget for this window. To set the focus to a particular widget in the toplevel, it is usually more convenient to use WidgetGrabFocus instead of this function.

Parameters: 

focus	widget to be the new focus widget, or NULL to unset

func (*CWindow) SetFocusOnMap 

func (w *CWindow) SetFocusOnMap(setting bool)

Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive the input focus when the window is mapped. This function sets this hint. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to let this window receive input focus on map

func (*CWindow) SetKeepAbove 

func (w *CWindow) SetKeepAbove(setting bool)

Asks to keep window above, so that it stays on top. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely above afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could not keep it above, and not all window managers support keeping windows above. But normally the window will end kept above. Just don't write code that crashes if not. It's permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be kept above when it appears onscreen initially. You can track the above state via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget. Note that, according to the Extended Window Manager Hints specification, the above state is mainly meant for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for drawing attention to their dialogs. Parameters: 

setting	whether to keep window

above other windows

func (*CWindow) SetKeepBelow 

func (w *CWindow) SetKeepBelow(setting bool)

Asks to keep window below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely below afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could not keep it below, and not all window managers support putting windows below. But normally the window will be kept below. Just don't write code that crashes if not. It's permitted to call this function before showing a window, in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen initially. You can track the below state via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget. Note that, according to the Extended Window Manager Hints specification, the above state is mainly meant for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for drawing attention to their dialogs. Parameters: 

setting	whether to keep window

below other windows

func (*CWindow) SetMnemonicModifier 

func (w *CWindow) SetMnemonicModifier(modifier cdk.ModMask)

Sets the mnemonic modifier for this window. Parameters: 

modifier	the modifier mask used to activate

mnemonics on this window.

func (*CWindow) SetMnemonicsVisible 

func (w *CWindow) SetMnemonicsVisible(setting bool)

Sets the mnemonics-visible property. Parameters: 

setting	the new value

func (*CWindow) SetModal 

func (w *CWindow) SetModal(modal bool)

Sets a window modal or non-modal. Modal windows prevent interaction with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs on top of main application windows, use SetTransientFor to make the dialog transient for the parent; most window managers will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent. Parameters: 

modal	whether the window is modal

func (*CWindow) SetOpacity 

func (w *CWindow) SetOpacity(opacity float64)

Request the windowing system to make window partially transparent, with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Values of the opacity parameter are clamped to the [0,1] range.) On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager running. See WidgetIsComposited. On Windows it should work always. Note that setting a window's opacity after the window has been shown causes it to flicker once on Windows. Parameters: 

opacity	desired opacity, between 0 and 1

func (*CWindow) SetPosition 

func (w *CWindow) SetPosition(position WindowPosition)

Sets a position constraint for this window. If the old or new constraint is GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS, this will also cause the window to be repositioned to satisfy the new constraint. Parameters: 

position	a position constraint.

func (*CWindow) SetResizable 

func (w *CWindow) SetResizable(resizable bool)

Sets whether the user can resize a window. Windows are user resizable by default. Parameters: 

resizable	TRUE if the user can resize this window

func (*CWindow) SetRole 

func (w *CWindow) SetRole(role string)

This function is only useful on X11, not with other CTK targets. In combination with the window title, the window role allows a same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you might set the "toolbox" role on your app's toolbox window, so that when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put the toolbox back in the same place. If a window already has a unique title, you don't need to set the role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when restoring the session. Parameters: 

role	unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session

func (*CWindow) SetSkipPagerHint 

func (w *CWindow) SetSkipPagerHint(setting bool)

Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display the window in the pager. This function sets this hint. (A "pager" is any desktop navigation tool such as a workspace switcher that displays a thumbnail representation of the windows on the screen.) Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to keep this window from appearing in the pager

func (*CWindow) SetSkipTaskbarHint 

func (w *CWindow) SetSkipTaskbarHint(setting bool)

Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to keep this window from appearing in the task bar

func (*CWindow) SetStartupId 

func (w *CWindow) SetStartupId(startupId string)

Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to track application startup, to provide user feedback and other features. This function changes the corresponding property on the underlying Window. Normally, startup identifier is managed automatically and you should only use this function in special cases like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this function before calling Present or any equivalent function generating a window map event. This function is only useful on X11, not with other CTK targets. Parameters: 

startupId	a string with startup-notification identifier

func (*CWindow) SetTitle 

func (w *CWindow) SetTitle(title string)

Sets the title of the Window. The title of a window will be displayed in its title bar; on the X Window System, the title bar is rendered by the window manager, so exactly how the title appears to users may vary according to a user's exact configuration. The title should help a user distinguish this window from other windows they may have open. A good title might include the application name and current document filename, for example. Parameters: 

title	title of the window

func (*CWindow) SetTransientFor 

func (w *CWindow) SetTransientFor(parent Window)

Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application window they were spawned from. This allows window managers to e.g. keep the dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the main window. DialogNewWithButtons and other convenience functions in CTK will sometimes call SetTransientFor on your behalf. Passing NULL for parent unsets the current transient window. On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent, much as the window manager would have done on X. Parameters: 

parent	parent window, or NULL.

func (*CWindow) SetUrgencyHint 

func (w *CWindow) SetUrgencyHint(setting bool)

Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint. Parameters: 

setting	TRUE to mark this window as urgent

func (*CWindow) SetWmClass 

func (w *CWindow) SetWmClass(wmClassName string, wmClassClass string)

Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and "name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should always set these to the same value for all windows in an application, and CTK sets them to that value by default, so calling this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call SetRole on each window in your application, for the benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session. Parameters: 

wmclassName	window name hint
wmclassClass	window class hint

func (*CWindow) Stick 

func (w *CWindow) Stick()

Asks to stick window , which means that it will appear on all user desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could unstick it again, and some window managers do not support sticking windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't write code that crashes if not. It's permitted to call this function before showing a window. You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) Unfullscreen 

func (w *CWindow) Unfullscreen()

Asks to toggle off the fullscreen state for window . Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely not full screen afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could fullscreen it again, and not all window managers honor requests to unfullscreen windows. But normally the window will end up restored to its normal state. Just don't write code that crashes if not. You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) Unmaximize 

func (w *CWindow) Unmaximize()

Asks to unmaximize window . Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could maximize it again, and not all window managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will end up unmaximized. Just don't write code that crashes if not. You can track maximization via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

func (*CWindow) Unstick 

func (w *CWindow) Unstick()

Asks to unstick window , which means that it will appear on only one of the user's desktops. Note that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely unstuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or window manager) could stick it again. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't write code that crashes if not. You can track stickiness via the "window-state-event" signal on Widget.

type CalendarDisplayOptions 

type CalendarDisplayOptions uint64

Calendar display options 

const (
	CALENDAR_SHOW_HEADING   CalendarDisplayOptions = 1 << 0
	CALENDAR_SHOW_DAY_NAMES CalendarDisplayOptions = 1 << iota
	CALENDAR_NO_MONTH_CHANGE
	CALENDAR_SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS
	CALENDAR_WEEK_START_MONDAY
	CALENDAR_SHOW_DETAILS
)

type Callback 

type Callback = func()

type CellRendererAccelMode 

type CellRendererAccelMode uint64

Cell renderer accel mode 

const (
	CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_CTK CellRendererAccelMode = iota
	CELL_RENDERER_ACCEL_MODE_OTHER
)

type CellRendererMode 

type CellRendererMode uint64

Cell renderer mode 

const (
	CELL_RENDERER_MODE_INERT CellRendererMode = iota
	CELL_RENDERER_MODE_ACTIVATABLE
	CELL_RENDERER_MODE_EDITABLE
)

type CellRendererState 

type CellRendererState uint64

Cell renderer state 

const (
	CELL_RENDERER_SELECTED CellRendererState = 1 << 0
	CELL_RENDERER_PRELIT   CellRendererState = 1 << iota
	CELL_RENDERER_INSENSITIVE
	CELL_RENDERER_SORTED
	CELL_RENDERER_FOCUSED
)

type CellType 

type CellType uint64

Cell type 

const (
	CELL_EMPTY CellType = iota
	CELL_TEXT
	CELL_PIXMAP
	CELL_PIXTEXT
	CELL_WIDGET
)

type Container 

type Container interface {
	Widget
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	AddWithProperties(widget Widget, argv ...interface{})
	ForEach(callback Callback, callbackData interface{})
	GetChildren() (children []Widget)
	GetFocusChild() (value Widget)
	SetFocusChild(child Widget)
	GetFocusVAdjustment() (value Adjustment)
	SetFocusVAdjustment(adjustment Adjustment)
	GetFocusHAdjustment() (value Adjustment)
	SetFocusHAdjustment(adjustment Adjustment)
	ChildType() (value cdk.CTypeTag)
	ChildGet(child Widget, properties ...cdk.Property) (values []interface{})
	ChildSet(child Widget, argv ...interface{})
	GetChildProperty(child Widget, propertyName cdk.Property) (value interface{})
	SetChildProperty(child Widget, propertyName cdk.Property, value interface{})
	ForAll(callback Callback, callbackData interface{})
	GetBorderWidth() (value int)
	SetBorderWidth(borderWidth int)
	GetFocusChain() (focusableWidgets []interface{}, explicitlySet bool)
	SetFocusChain(focusableWidgets []interface{})
	UnsetFocusChain()
	FindChildProperty(property cdk.Property) (value *cdk.CProperty)
	InstallChildProperty(name cdk.Property, kind cdk.PropertyType, write bool, def interface{}) error
	ListChildProperties() (properties []*cdk.CProperty)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	SetOrigin(x, y int)
	SetWindow(w Window)
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	ShowAll()
}

Container Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
      +- Box
      +- CList
      +- Fixed
      +- Paned
      +- IconView
      +- Layout
      +- List
      +- MenuShell
      +- Notebook
      +- Socket
      +- Table
      +- TextView
      +- Toolbar
      +- ToolItemGroup
      +- ToolPalette
      +- Tree
      +- TreeView

In the Curses Tool Kit, the Container interface is an extension of the CTK Widget interface and for all intents and purposes, this is the base class for any CTK type that will contain other widgets. The Container also supports the tracking of focus and default widgets by maintaining two WidgetChain types: FocusChain and DefaultChain.

type CornerType 

type CornerType uint64

Corner type 

const (
	CornerTopLeft CornerType = iota
	CornerBottomLeft
	CornerTopRight
	CornerBottomRight
)

type CurveType 

type CurveType uint64

Curve type 

const (
	CURVE_TYPE_LINEAR CurveType = iota
	CURVE_TYPE_SPLINE
	CURVE_TYPE_FREE
)

type DebugFlag 

type DebugFlag uint64

Debug flag 

const (
	DEBUG_MISC       DebugFlag = 1 << 0
	DEBUG_PLUGSOCKET DebugFlag = 1 << iota
	DEBUG_TEXT
	DEBUG_TREE
	DEBUG_UPDATES
	DEBUG_KEYBINDINGS
	DEBUG_MULTIHEAD
	DEBUG_MODULES
	DEBUG_GEOMETRY
	DEBUG_ICONTHEME
	DEBUG_PRINTING
	DEBUG_BUILDER
)

type DeleteType 

type DeleteType uint64

Delete type 

const (
	DELETE_CHARS DeleteType = iota
	DELETE_WORD_ENDS
	DELETE_WORDS
	DELETE_DISPLAY_LINES
	DELETE_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS
	DELETE_PARAGRAPH_ENDS
	DELETE_PARAGRAPHS
	DELETE_WHITESPACE
)

type Dialog 

type Dialog interface {
	Window
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	Run() (response chan ResponseType)
	Response(responseId ResponseType)
	AddButton(buttonText string, responseId ResponseType) (value Button)
	AddButtons(argv ...interface{})
	AddActionWidget(child Widget, responseId ResponseType)
	AddSecondaryActionWidget(child Widget, responseId ResponseType)
	SetDefaultResponse(responseId ResponseType)
	SetResponseSensitive(responseId ResponseType, sensitive bool)
	GetResponseForWidget(widget Widget) (value ResponseType)
	GetWidgetForResponse(responseId ResponseType) (value Widget)
	GetActionArea() (value ButtonBox)
	GetContentArea() (value VBox)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	Show()
	Destroy()
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Dialog Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Window
          +- Dialog
            +- AboutDialog
            +- ColorSelectionDialog
            +- FileChooserDialog
            +- FileSelection
            +- FontSelectionDialog
            +- InputDialog
            +- MessageDialog
            +- PageSetupUnixDialog
            +- PrintUnixDialog
            +- RecentChooserDialog

type DialogFlags 

type DialogFlags uint64

Dialog flags 

const (
	DialogModal             DialogFlags = 1 << 0
	DialogDestroyWithParent DialogFlags = 1 << iota
	DialogNoSeparator
)

type DirectionType 

type DirectionType uint64

Direction type 

const (
	DIR_TAB_FORWARD DirectionType = iota
	DIR_TAB_BACKWARD
	DIR_UP
	DIR_DOWN
	DIR_LEFT
	DIR_RIGHT
)

type Drawable 

type Drawable interface {
	Hide()
	Show()
	ShowAll()
	IsVisible() bool
	HasPoint(p *cdk.Point2I) bool
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) (instance interface{})
	GetSizeRequest() (size cdk.Rectangle)
	SetSizeRequest(x, y int)
	GetTheme() (theme cdk.Theme)
	SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)
	GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)
	GetOrigin() (origin cdk.Point2I)
	SetOrigin(x, y int)
	GetAllocation() (alloc cdk.Rectangle)
	SetAllocation(alloc cdk.Rectangle)
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

type EntryIconPosition 

type EntryIconPosition uint64

Entry icon position 

const (
	ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY EntryIconPosition = iota
	ENTRY_ICON_SECONDARY
)

type EnumFromString 

type EnumFromString interface {
	FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)
}

type ErrorType 

type ErrorType uint64

Error type 

const (
	ERR_UNKNOWN ErrorType = iota
	ERR_UNEXP_EOF
	ERR_UNEXP_EOF_IN_STRING
	ERR_UNEXP_EOF_IN_COMMENT
	ERR_NON_DIGIT_IN_CONST
	ERR_DIGIT_RADIX
	ERR_FLOAT_RADIX
	ERR_FLOAT_MALFORMED
)

type EventBox 

type EventBox interface {
	Bin
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	SetAboveChild(aboveChild bool)
	GetAboveChild() (value bool)
	SetVisibleWindow(visibleWindow bool)
	GetVisibleWindow() (value bool)
	GrabFocus()
	Activate() (value bool)
	CancelEvent()
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
}

EventBox Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- EventBox

type ExpanderStyle 

type ExpanderStyle uint64

Expander style 

const (
	EXPANDER_COLLAPSED ExpanderStyle = iota
	EXPANDER_SEMI_COLLAPSED
	EXPANDER_SEMI_EXPANDED
	EXPANDER_EXPANDED
)

type ExtensionMode 

type ExtensionMode uint64
const (
	EXTENSION_EVENTS_NONE ExtensionMode = iota
	EXTENSION_EVENTS_ALL
	EXTENSION_EVENTS_CURSOR
)

type FileChooserAction 

type FileChooserAction uint64

File chooser action 

const (
	FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN FileChooserAction = iota
	FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE
	FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER
	FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_CREATE_FOLDER
)

type FileChooserConfirmation 

type FileChooserConfirmation uint64

File chooser confirmation 

const (
	FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_CONFIRM FileChooserConfirmation = iota
	FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_ACCEPT_FILENAME
	FILE_CHOOSER_CONFIRMATION_SELECT_AGAIN
)

type FileChooserError 

type FileChooserError uint64

File chooser error 

const (
	FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_NONEXISTENT FileChooserError = iota
	FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_BAD_FILENAME
	FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_ALREADY_EXISTS
	FILE_CHOOSER_ERROR_INCOMPLETE_HOSTNAME
)

type FileChooserProp 

type FileChooserProp uint64

File chooser prop 

const (
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_FIRST               FileChooserProp = 0
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_ACTION              FileChooserProp = FileChooserProp(FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_FIRST)
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_FILE_SYSTEM_BACKEND FileChooserProp = iota
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_FILTER
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_LOCAL_ONLY
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_PREVIEW_WIDGET
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_PREVIEW_WIDGET_ACTIVE
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_USE_PREVIEW_LABEL
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_EXTRA_WIDGET
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_SELECT_MULTIPLE
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_SHOW_HIDDEN
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_DO_OVERWRITE_CONFIRMATION
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_CREATE_FOLDERS
	FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_LAST FileChooserProp = FileChooserProp(FILE_CHOOSER_PROP_CREATE_FOLDERS)
)

type FileFilterFlags 

type FileFilterFlags uint64

File filter flags 

const (
	FILE_FILTER_FILENAME FileFilterFlags = 1 << 0
	FILE_FILTER_URI      FileFilterFlags = 1 << iota
	FILE_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME
	FILE_FILTER_MIME_TYPE
)

type Frame 

type Frame interface {
	Bin
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	SetLabel(label string)
	SetLabelWidget(labelWidget Widget)
	SetLabelAlign(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	SetShadowType(shadowType ShadowType)
	GetLabel() (value string)
	GetLabelAlign() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	GetLabelWidget() (value Widget)
	GetShadowType() (value ShadowType)
	GrabFocus()
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	IsFocus() bool
	GetFocusWithChild() (focusWithChild bool)
	SetFocusWithChild(focusWithChild bool)
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
}

Frame Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Frame
          +- AspectFrame

type GClosure 

type GClosure = func(argv ...interface{}) (handled bool)

type Gravity 

type Gravity uint64
const (
	// The reference point is at the top left corner.
	GravityNorthWest Gravity = iota
	// The reference point is in the middle of the top edge.
	GravityNorth
	// The reference point is at the top right corner.
	GravityNorthEast
	// The reference point is at the middle of the left edge.
	GravityWest
	// The reference point is at the center of the window.
	GravityCenter
	// The reference point is at the middle of the right edge.
	GravityEast
	// The reference point is at the lower left corner.
	GravitySouthWest
	// The reference point is at the middle of the lower edge.
	GravitySouth
	// The reference point is at the lower right corner.
	GravitySouthEast
	// The reference point is at the top left corner of the window itself, ignoring window manager decorations.
	GravityStatic
)

func (Gravity) FromString 

func (t Gravity) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type HBox 

type HBox interface {
	Box

	Init() bool
}

type HButtonBox 

type HButtonBox interface {
	ButtonBox

	Init() bool
}

type HScrollbar 

type HScrollbar interface {
	Scrollbar

	Init() (already bool)
}

type IMPreeditStyle 

type IMPreeditStyle uint64

Preedit style 

const (
	IM_PREEDIT_NOTHING IMPreeditStyle = iota
	IM_PREEDIT_CALLBACK
	IM_PREEDIT_NONE
)

type IMStatusStyle 

type IMStatusStyle uint64

Status style 

const (
	IM_STATUS_NOTHING IMStatusStyle = iota
	IM_STATUS_CALLBACK
	IM_STATUS_NONE
)

type IconLookupFlags 

type IconLookupFlags uint64

Icon lookup flags 

const (
	ICON_LOOKUP_NO_SVG    IconLookupFlags = 1 << 0
	ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SVG IconLookupFlags = 1 << iota
	ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN
	ICON_LOOKUP_GENERIC_FALLBACK
	ICON_LOOKUP_FORCE_SIZE
)

type IconSize 

type IconSize uint64

Icon size 

const (
	ICON_SIZE_INVALID IconSize = iota
	ICON_SIZE_MENU
	ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR
	ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR
	ICON_SIZE_BUTTON
	ICON_SIZE_DND
	ICON_SIZE_DIALOG
)

type IconThemeError 

type IconThemeError uint64

Icon style error 

const (
	ICON_THEME_NOT_FOUND IconThemeError = iota
	ICON_THEME_FAILED
)

type IconViewDropPosition 

type IconViewDropPosition uint64

Icon view drop position 

const (
	ICON_VIEW_NO_DROP IconViewDropPosition = iota
	ICON_VIEW_DROP_INTO
	ICON_VIEW_DROP_LEFT
	ICON_VIEW_DROP_RIGHT
	ICON_VIEW_DROP_ABOVE
	ICON_VIEW_DROP_BELOW
)

type ImageType 

type ImageType uint64

Image type 

const (
	IMAGE_EMPTY ImageType = iota
	IMAGE_PIXMAP
	IMAGE_IMAGE
	IMAGE_PIXBUF
	IMAGE_STOCK
	IMAGE_ICON_SET
	IMAGE_ANIMATION
	IMAGE_ICON_NAME
	IMAGE_GICON
)

type Label 

type Label interface {
	Misc
	Alignable
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	SetText(text string)
	SetAttributes(attrs cdk.Style)
	SetMarkup(text string) (parseError error)
	SetMarkupWithMnemonic(str string) (err error)
	SetJustify(justify cdk.Justification)
	SetEllipsize(mode bool)
	SetWidthChars(nChars int)
	SetMaxWidthChars(nChars int)
	SetLineWrap(wrap bool)
	SetLineWrapMode(wrapMode cdk.WrapMode)
	GetMnemonicKeyVal() (value rune)
	GetSelectable() (value bool)
	GetText() (value string)
	SelectRegion(startOffset int, endOffset int)
	SetMnemonicWidget(widget Widget)
	SetSelectable(setting bool)
	SetTextWithMnemonic(str string)
	GetAttributes() (value cdk.Style)
	GetJustify() (value cdk.Justification)
	GetEllipsize() (value bool)
	GetWidthChars() (value int)
	GetMaxWidthChars() (value int)
	GetLabel() (value string)
	GetLineWrap() (value bool)
	GetLineWrapMode() (value cdk.WrapMode)
	GetMnemonicWidget() (value Widget)
	GetSelectionBounds() (start int, end int, nonEmpty bool)
	GetUseMarkup() (value bool)
	GetUseUnderline() (value bool)
	GetSingleLineMode() (value bool)
	SetLabel(str string)
	SetUseMarkup(setting bool)
	SetUseUnderline(setting bool)
	SetSingleLineMode(singleLineMode bool)
	GetCurrentUri() (value string)
	SetTrackVisitedLinks(trackLinks bool)
	GetTrackVisitedLinks() (value bool)
	SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)
	GetClearText() (text string)
	GetPlainText() (text string)
	GetCleanText() (text string)
	GetPlainTextInfo() (maxWidth, lineCount int)
	GetPlainTextInfoAtWidth(width int) (maxWidth, lineCount int)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
}

Label Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Misc
      +- Label
        +- AccelLabel
        +- TipsQuery

type LayoutStyle 

type LayoutStyle uint64

layout style 

const (
	LayoutStart LayoutStyle = iota
	LayoutEnd
)

func (LayoutStyle) FromString 

func (l LayoutStyle) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type LoadState 

type LoadState uint64

Load state 

const (
	LOAD_EMPTY LoadState = iota
	LOAD_PRELOAD
	LOAD_LOADING
	LOAD_FINISHED
)

type LocationMode 

type LocationMode uint64

Location mode 

const (
	LOCATION_MODE_PATH_BAR LocationMode = iota
	LOCATION_MODE_FILENAME_ENTRY
)

type MatchType 

type MatchType uint64

Match type 

const (
	MATCH_ALL MatchType = iota
	MATCH_ALL_TAIL
	MATCH_HEAD
	MATCH_TAIL
	MATCH_EXACT
	MATCH_LAST
)
type MenuDirectionType uint64

Menu direction type 

const (
	MENU_DIR_PARENT MenuDirectionType = iota
	MENU_DIR_CHILD
	MENU_DIR_NEXT
	MENU_DIR_PREV
)

type MessageType 

type MessageType uint64

Message type 

const (
	MESSAGE_INFO MessageType = iota
	MESSAGE_WARNING
	MESSAGE_QUESTION
	MESSAGE_ERROR
	MESSAGE_OTHER
)

type MetricType 

type MetricType uint64

Metric type 

const (
	PIXELS MetricType = iota
	INCHES
	CENTIMETERS
)

type Misc 

type Misc interface {
	Widget
	Buildable

	Init() (already bool)
	SetAlignment(xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	SetPadding(xPad int, yPad int)
	GetAlignment() (xAlign float64, yAlign float64)
	GetPadding() (xPad int, yPad int)
}

Misc Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Misc
      +- Label
      +- Arrow
      +- Image
      +- Pixmap

type ModifierType 

type ModifierType uint64
const (
	NullModMask ModifierType = 0
	ShiftMask   ModifierType = iota
	LockMask
	ControlMask
	Mod1Mask
	Mod2Mask
	Mod3Mask
	Mod4Mask
	Mod5Mask
	Button1Mask
	Button2Mask
	Button3Mask
	Button4Mask
	Button5Mask
	SuperMask
	HyperMask
	MetaMask
	ReleaseMask
	ModifierMask
)

func (ModifierType) HasBit 

func (m ModifierType) HasBit(b ModifierType) bool

func (ModifierType) String 

func (m ModifierType) String() string

type MovementStep 

type MovementStep uint64

Movement step 

const (
	MOVEMENT_LOGICAL_POSITIONS MovementStep = iota
	MOVEMENT_VISUAL_POSITIONS
	MOVEMENT_WORDS
	MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINES
	MOVEMENT_DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS
	MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPHS
	MOVEMENT_PARAGRAPH_ENDS
	MOVEMENT_PAGES
	MOVEMENT_BUFFER_ENDS
	MOVEMENT_HORIZONTAL_PAGES
)

type NotebookTab 

type NotebookTab uint64

Notebook tab 

const (
	NOTEBOOK_TAB_FIRST NotebookTab = iota
	NOTEBOOK_TAB_LAST
)

type NumberUpLayout 

type NumberUpLayout uint64

Number up layout 

const (
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_LEFT_TO_RIGHT_TOP_TO_BOTTOM NumberUpLayout = iota
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_LEFT_TO_RIGHT_BOTTOM_TO_TOP
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_RIGHT_TO_LEFT_TOP_TO_BOTTOM
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_RIGHT_TO_LEFT_BOTTOM_TO_TOP
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_TOP_TO_BOTTOM_LEFT_TO_RIGHT
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_TOP_TO_BOTTOM_RIGHT_TO_LEFT
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_BOTTOM_TO_TOP_LEFT_TO_RIGHT
	NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT_BOTTOM_TO_TOP_RIGHT_TO_LEFT
)

type Object 

type Object interface {
	cdk.Object

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	ObjectInfo() string
	SetOrigin(x, y int)
	GetOrigin() cdk.Point2I
	SetAllocation(size cdk.Rectangle)
	GetAllocation() cdk.Rectangle
	GetObjectAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Object
	HasPoint(p *cdk.Point2I) (contains bool)
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	GetTextDirection() (direction TextDirection)
	SetTextDirection(direction TextDirection)
	CssSelector() (selector string)
	InstallCssProperty(name cdk.Property, kind cdk.PropertyType, write bool, def interface{}) (err error)
	GetCssProperty(name cdk.Property) (property *cdk.CProperty)
	GetCssProperties() (properties []*cdk.CProperty)
	GetCssBool(name cdk.Property) (value bool, err error)
	GetCssString(name cdk.Property) (value string, err error)
	GetCssInt(name cdk.Property) (value int, err error)
	GetCssFloat(name cdk.Property) (value float64, err error)
	GetCssColor(name cdk.Property) (value cdk.Color, err error)
}

In the Curses Tool Kit, the Object type is an extension of the CDK Object type and for all intents and purposes, this is the base class for any CTK type with no other CTK type embedding a CDK type directly

type OperationMode 

type OperationMode uint64

Operation mode 

const (
	OPERATION_MODE_BROWSE OperationMode = iota
	OPERATION_MODE_SEARCH
	OPERATION_MODE_RECENT
)

type Orientable 

type Orientable interface {
	GetOrientation() (orientation cdk.Orientation)
	SetOrientation(orientation cdk.Orientation)
}

type PackDirection 

type PackDirection uint64

packing direction 

const (
	PACK_DIRECTION_LTR PackDirection = iota
	PACK_DIRECTION_RTL
	PACK_DIRECTION_TTB
	PACK_DIRECTION_BTT
)

type PackType 

type PackType uint64

packing type 

const (
	PackStart PackType = iota
	PackEnd
)

type PageSet 

type PageSet uint64

Page set 

const (
	PAGE_SET_ALL PageSet = iota
	PAGE_SET_EVEN
	PAGE_SET_ODD
)

type ParamFlags 

type ParamFlags uint64

Param flags 

const (
	PARAM_READABLE  ParamFlags = 1 << 0
	PARAM_WRITABLE  ParamFlags = 1 << iota
	PARAM_READWRITE ParamFlags = ParamFlags(PARAM_READABLE | PARAM_WRITABLE)
	PARAM_CONSTRUCT
	PARAM_CONSTRUCT_ONLY
	PARAM_LAX_VALIDATION
	PARAM_STATIC_NAME
	PARAM_PRIVATE ParamFlags = ParamFlags(PARAM_STATIC_NAME)
	PARAM_STATIC_NICK
	PARAM_STATIC_BLURB
	PARAM_EXPLICIT_NOTIFY
)

type PathPriorityType 

type PathPriorityType uint64

Path priority type 

const (
	PATH_PRIO_LOWEST      PathPriorityType = 0
	PATH_PRIO_CTK         PathPriorityType = 4
	PATH_PRIO_APPLICATION PathPriorityType = 8
	PATH_PRIO_THEME       PathPriorityType = 10
	PATH_PRIO_RC          PathPriorityType = 12
	PATH_PRIO_HIGHEST     PathPriorityType = 15
)

type PathType 

type PathType uint64

Path type 

const (
	PATH_WIDGET PathType = iota
	PATH_WIDGET_CLASS
	PATH_CLASS
)

type PolicyType 

type PolicyType uint64

Policy type 

const (
	PolicyAlways PolicyType = iota
	PolicyAutomatic
	PolicyNever
)

func (PolicyType) FromString 

func (p PolicyType) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type PositionType 

type PositionType uint64

Position type 

const (
	POS_LEFT PositionType = iota
	POS_RIGHT
	POS_TOP
	POS_BOTTOM
)

type PrintPages 

type PrintPages uint64

Print pages 

const (
	PRINT_PAGES_ALL PrintPages = iota
	PRINT_PAGES_CURRENT
	PRINT_PAGES_RANGES
	PRINT_PAGES_SELECTION
)

type PrivateFlags 

type PrivateFlags uint64

Private flags 

const (
	PRIVATE_USER_STYLE      PrivateFlags = 1 << 0
	PRIVATE_RESIZE_PENDING  PrivateFlags = 1 << 2
	PRIVATE_HAS_POINTER     PrivateFlags = 1 << 3
	PRIVATE_SHADOWED        PrivateFlags = 1 << 4
	PRIVATE_HAS_SHAPE_MASK  PrivateFlags = 1 << 5
	PRIVATE_IN_REPARENT     PrivateFlags = 1 << 6
	PRIVATE_DIRECTION_SET   PrivateFlags = 1 << 7
	PRIVATE_DIRECTION_LTR   PrivateFlags = 1 << 8
	PRIVATE_ANCHORED        PrivateFlags = 1 << 9
	PRIVATE_CHILD_VISIBLE   PrivateFlags = 1 << 10
	PRIVATE_REDRAW_ON_ALLOC PrivateFlags = 1 << 11
	PRIVATE_ALLOC_NEEDED    PrivateFlags = 1 << 12
	PRIVATE_REQUEST_NEEDED  PrivateFlags = 1 << 13
)

type ProgressBarOrientation 

type ProgressBarOrientation uint64

Progress bar orientation 

const (
	PROGRESS_LEFT_TO_RIGHT ProgressBarOrientation = iota
	PROGRESS_RIGHT_TO_LEFT
	PROGRESS_BOTTOM_TO_TOP
	PROGRESS_TOP_TO_BOTTOM
)

type ProgressBarStyle 

type ProgressBarStyle uint64

Progress bar style 

const (
	PROGRESS_CONTINUOUS ProgressBarStyle = iota
	PROGRESS_DISCRETE
)

type RBNodeColor 

type RBNodeColor uint64

Node color 

const (
	RBNODE_BLACK RBNodeColor = 1 << 0
	RBNODE_RED   RBNodeColor = 1 << iota
	RBNODE_IS_PARENT
	RBNODE_IS_SELECTED
	RBNODE_IS_PRELIT
	RBNODE_IS_SEMI_COLLAPSED
	RBNODE_IS_SEMI_EXPANDED
	RBNODE_INVALID
	RBNODE_COLUMN_INVALID
	RBNODE_DESCENDANTS_INVALID
	RBNODE_NON_COLORS RBNodeColor = RBNodeColor(RBNODE_IS_PARENT)
)

type Range 

type Range interface {
	Widget

	Init() (already bool)
	GetFillLevel() (value float64)
	GetRestrictToFillLevel() (value bool)
	GetShowFillLevel() (value bool)
	SetFillLevel(fillLevel float64)
	SetRestrictToFillLevel(restrictToFillLevel bool)
	SetShowFillLevel(showFillLevel bool)
	GetAdjustment() (adjustment *CAdjustment)
	GetInverted() (value bool)
	SetInverted(setting bool)
	SetIncrements(step int, page int)
	SetRange(min, max int)
	GetValue() (value int)
	SetValue(value int)
	GetRoundDigits() (value int)
	SetRoundDigits(roundDigits int)
	SetLowerStepperSensitivity(sensitivity SensitivityType)
	GetLowerStepperSensitivity() (value SensitivityType)
	SetUpperStepperSensitivity(sensitivity SensitivityType)
	GetUpperStepperSensitivity() (value SensitivityType)
	GetFlippable() (value bool)
	SetFlippable(flippable bool)
	GetMinSliderSize() (value int)
	GetRangeRect(rangeRect cdk.Rectangle)
	GetSliderRange(sliderStart int, sliderEnd int)
	GetSliderSizeFixed() (value bool)
	SetMinSliderSize(minSize bool)
	SetSliderSizeFixed(sizeFixed bool)
	GetIncrements() (step int, page int)
	GetRange() (min, max int)
	GetMinSliderLength() (length int)
	SetMinSliderLength(length int)
	GetSliderLength() (length int)
	SetSliderLength(length int)
	GetStepperSize() (size int)
	SetStepperSize(size int)
	GetStepperSpacing() (spacing int)
	SetStepperSpacing(spacing int)
	GetTroughUnderSteppers() (underSteppers bool)
	SetTroughUnderSteppers(underSteppers bool)
}

Range Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Range
      +- Scale
      +- Scrollbar

type RcFlags 

type RcFlags uint64

Rc flags 

const (
	RC_FG RcFlags = 1 << 0
	RC_BG RcFlags = 1 << iota
	RC_TEXT
	RC_BASE
)

type RcStyle 

type RcStyle interface {
}

type RcTokenType 

type RcTokenType uint64

Rc token type 

const (
	RC_TOKEN_INVALID RcTokenType = RcTokenType(TOKEN_LAST)
	RC_TOKEN_INCLUDE RcTokenType = iota
	RC_TOKEN_NORMAL
	RC_TOKEN_ACTIVE
	RC_TOKEN_PRELIGHT
	RC_TOKEN_SELECTED
	RC_TOKEN_INSENSITIVE
	RC_TOKEN_FG
	RC_TOKEN_BG
	RC_TOKEN_TEXT
	RC_TOKEN_BASE
	RC_TOKEN_XTHICKNESS
	RC_TOKEN_YTHICKNESS
	RC_TOKEN_FONT
	RC_TOKEN_FONTSET
	RC_TOKEN_FONT_NAME
	RC_TOKEN_BC_PIXMAP
	RC_TOKEN_PIXMAP_PATH
	RC_TOKEN_STYLE
	RC_TOKEN_BINDING
	RC_TOKEN_BIND
	RC_TOKEN_WIDGET
	RC_TOKEN_WIDGET_CLASS
	RC_TOKEN_CLASS
	RC_TOKEN_LOWEST
	RC_TOKEN_CTK
	RC_TOKEN_APPLICATION
	RC_TOKEN_THEME
	RC_TOKEN_RC
	RC_TOKEN_HIGHEST
	RC_TOKEN_ENGINE
	RC_TOKEN_MODULE_PATH
	RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_PATH
	RC_TOKEN_IM_MODULE_FILE
	RC_TOKEN_STOCK
	RC_TOKEN_LTR
	RC_TOKEN_RTL
	RC_TOKEN_COLOR
	RC_TOKEN_UNBIND
	RC_TOKEN_LAST
)

type RecentChooserError 

type RecentChooserError uint64

Recent chooser error 

const (
	RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND RecentChooserError = iota
	RECENT_CHOOSER_ERROR_INVALID_URI
)

type RecentChooserProp 

type RecentChooserProp uint64

Recent chooser prop 

const (
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_FIRST          RecentChooserProp = 0
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_RECENT_MANAGER RecentChooserProp = iota
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SHOW_PRIVATE
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SHOW_NOT_FOUND
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SHOW_TIPS
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SHOW_ICONS
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SELECT_MULTIPLE
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_LIMIT
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_LOCAL_ONLY
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_SORT_TYPE
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_FILTER
	RECENT_CHOOSER_PROP_LAST
)

type RecentFilterFlags 

type RecentFilterFlags uint64

Recent filter flags 

const (
	RECENT_FILTER_URI          RecentFilterFlags = 1 << 0
	RECENT_FILTER_DISPLAY_NAME RecentFilterFlags = 1 << iota
	RECENT_FILTER_MIME_TYPE
	RECENT_FILTER_APPLICATION
	RECENT_FILTER_GROUP
	RECENT_FILTER_AGE
)

type RecentManagerError 

type RecentManagerError uint64

Recent manager error 

const (
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_FOUND RecentManagerError = iota
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_URI
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_INVALID_ENCODING
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_NOT_REGISTERED
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_READ
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_WRITE
	RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR_UNKNOWN
)

type RecentSortType 

type RecentSortType uint64

Recent sort type 

const (
	RECENT_SORT_NONE RecentSortType = 0
	RECENT_SORT_MRU  RecentSortType = iota
	RECENT_SORT_LRU
	RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM
)

type ReliefStyle 

type ReliefStyle uint64

Relief style 

const (
	RELIEF_NORMAL ReliefStyle = iota
	RELIEF_HALF
	RELIEF_NONE
)

type ReloadState 

type ReloadState uint64

Reload state 

const (
	RELOAD_EMPTY ReloadState = iota
	RELOAD_HAS_FOLDER
)

type ResponseType 

type ResponseType int

Response type 

const (
	ResponseNone        ResponseType = -1
	ResponseReject      ResponseType = -2
	ResponseAccept      ResponseType = -3
	ResponseDeleteEvent ResponseType = -4
	ResponseOk          ResponseType = -5
	ResponseCancel      ResponseType = -6
	ResponseClose       ResponseType = -7
	ResponseYes         ResponseType = -8
	ResponseNo          ResponseType = -9
	ResponseApply       ResponseType = -10
	ResponseHelp        ResponseType = -11
)

func ResponseTypeFromName 

func ResponseTypeFromName(name string) ResponseType

func (ResponseType) String 

func (r ResponseType) String() string

type ScrollStep 

type ScrollStep uint64

Scroll step 

const (
	SCROLL_STEPS ScrollStep = iota
	SCROLL_PAGES
	SCROLL_ENDS
	SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_STEPS
	SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_PAGES
	SCROLL_HORIZONTAL_ENDS
)

type ScrollType 

type ScrollType uint64

Scroll type 

const (
	SCROLL_NONE ScrollType = iota
	SCROLL_JUMP
	SCROLL_STEP_BACKWARD
	SCROLL_STEP_FORWARD
	SCROLL_PAGE_BACKWARD
	SCROLL_PAGE_FORWARD
	SCROLL_STEP_UP
	SCROLL_STEP_DOWN
	SCROLL_PAGE_UP
	SCROLL_PAGE_DOWN
	SCROLL_STEP_LEFT
	SCROLL_STEP_RIGHT
	SCROLL_PAGE_LEFT
	SCROLL_PAGE_RIGHT
	SCROLL_START
	SCROLL_END
)

type Scrollbar 

type Scrollbar interface {
	Range

	Init() (already bool)
	GetHasBackwardStepper() (hasBackwardStepper bool)
	SetHasBackwardStepper(hasBackwardStepper bool)
	GetHasForwardStepper() (hasForwardStepper bool)
	SetHasForwardStepper(hasForwardStepper bool)
	GetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper() (hasSecondaryBackwardStepper bool)
	SetHasSecondaryBackwardStepper(hasSecondaryBackwardStepper bool)
	GetHasSecondaryForwardStepper() (hasSecondaryForwardStepper bool)
	SetHasSecondaryForwardStepper(hasSecondaryForwardStepper bool)
	Forward(step int) cdk.EventFlag
	ForwardStep() cdk.EventFlag
	ForwardPage() cdk.EventFlag
	Backward(step int) cdk.EventFlag
	BackwardStep() cdk.EventFlag
	BackwardPage() cdk.EventFlag
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	ValueChanged()
	Changed()
	GrabFocus()
	CancelEvent()
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	ProcessEventAtPoint(p *cdk.Point2I, e *cdk.EventMouse) cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
	GetAllStepperRegions() (fwd, bwd, sFwd, sBwd cdk.Region)
	GetStepperRegions() (start, end cdk.Region)
	GetTroughRegion() (region cdk.Region)
	GetSliderRegion() (region cdk.Region)
}

Scrollbar Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Range
      +- Scrollbar
        +- HScrollbar
        +- VScrollbar

type ScrolledViewport 

type ScrolledViewport interface {
	Viewport

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	GetHAdjustment() (value *CAdjustment)
	GetVAdjustment() (value *CAdjustment)
	SetPolicy(hScrollbarPolicy PolicyType, vScrollbarPolicy PolicyType)
	AddWithViewport(child Widget)
	SetPlacement(windowPlacement CornerType)
	UnsetPlacement()
	SetShadowType(t ShadowType)
	SetHAdjustment(hAdjustment *CAdjustment)
	SetVAdjustment(vAdjustment *CAdjustment)
	GetPlacement() (value CornerType)
	GetPolicy() (hScrollbarPolicy PolicyType, vScrollbarPolicy PolicyType)
	GetShadowType() (value ShadowType)
	VerticalShowByPolicy() (show bool)
	HorizontalShowByPolicy() (show bool)
	SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)
	Add(w Widget)
	Remove(w Widget)
	GetChild() Widget
	GetHScrollbar() *CHScrollbar
	GetVScrollbar() *CVScrollbar
	Show()
	Hide()
	GrabFocus()
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	InternalGetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
	CancelEvent()
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	ProcessEventAtPoint(p *cdk.Point2I, evt *cdk.EventMouse) cdk.EventFlag
	GetRegions() (c, h, v cdk.Region)
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
}

ScrolledViewport Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- ScrolledViewport

type SelectionMode 

type SelectionMode uint64

Selection mode 

const (
	SELECTION_NONE SelectionMode = iota
	SELECTION_SINGLE
	SELECTION_BROWSE
	SELECTION_MULTIPLE
	SELECTION_EXTENDED SelectionMode = SelectionMode(SELECTION_MULTIPLE)
)

type Sensitive 

type Sensitive interface {
	Object

	GetWindow() Window
	CanFocus() bool
	IsFocus() bool
	IsFocused() bool
	IsVisible() bool
	GrabFocus()
	CancelEvent()
	IsSensitive() bool
	SetSensitive(sensitive bool)
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
}

type SensitivityType 

type SensitivityType uint64

Sensitivity type 

const (
	SensitivityAuto SensitivityType = iota
	SensitivityOn
	SensitivityOff
)

type ShadowType 

type ShadowType uint64

Shadow type 

const (
	SHADOW_NONE ShadowType = iota
	SHADOW_IN
	SHADOW_OUT
	SHADOW_ETCHED_IN
	SHADOW_ETCHED_OUT
)

type SideType 

type SideType uint64

Side type 

const (
	SIDE_TOP SideType = iota
	SIDE_BOTTOM
	SIDE_LEFT
	SIDE_RIGHT
)

type SizeGroupMode 

type SizeGroupMode uint64

Size group mode 

const (
	SIZE_GROUP_NONE SizeGroupMode = iota
	SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL
	SIZE_GROUP_VERTICAL
	SIZE_GROUP_BOTH
)

type SortType 

type SortType uint64

Sort type 

const (
	SORT_ASCENDING SortType = iota
	SORT_DESCENDING
)

type SpinButtonUpdatePolicy 

type SpinButtonUpdatePolicy uint64

Spin button update policy 

const (
	UPDATE_ALWAYS SpinButtonUpdatePolicy = iota
	UPDATE_IF_VALID
)

type SpinType 

type SpinType uint64

Spin type 

const (
	SPIN_STEP_FORWARD SpinType = iota
	SPIN_STEP_BACKWARD
	SPIN_PAGE_FORWARD
	SPIN_PAGE_BACKWARD
	SPIN_HOME
	SPIN_END
	SPIN_USER_DEFINED
)

type StartupMode 

type StartupMode uint64

Startup mode 

const (
	STARTUP_MODE_RECENT StartupMode = iota
	STARTUP_MODE_CWD
)

type StateType 

type StateType uint64

State type 

const (
	StateNormal StateType = iota
	StateActive
	StatePrelight
	StateSelected
	StateInsensitive
)

type StockID 

type StockID string

Stock items represent commonly-used menu or toolbar items such as "Open" or "Exit". Each stock item is identified by a stock ID; stock IDs are just strings, and constants such as StockOpen are provided to avoid typing mistakes in the strings. Applications can register their own stock items in addition to those built-in to CTK.

Each stock ID can be associated with a StockItem, which contains the user-visible label, keyboard accelerator, and translation domain of the menu or toolbar item; and/or with an icon stored in a GtkIconFactory. See IconFactory for more information on stock icons. The connection between a StockItem and stock icons is purely conventional (by virtue of using the same stock ID); it's possible to register a stock item but no icon, and vice versa. Stock icons may have a RTL variant which gets used for right-to-left locales. 

const (
	StockAbout          StockID = "ctk-about"
	StockAdd            StockID = "ctk-add"
	StockApply          StockID = "ctk-apply"
	StockBold           StockID = "ctk-bold"
	StockCancel         StockID = "ctk-cancel"
	StockClear          StockID = "ctk-clear"
	StockClose          StockID = "ctk-close"
	StockConvert        StockID = "ctk-convert"
	StockConnect        StockID = "ctk-connect"
	StockCopy           StockID = "ctk-copy"
	StockCut            StockID = "ctk-cut"
	StockDelete         StockID = "ctk-delete"
	StockDialogError    StockID = "ctk-dialog-error"
	StockDialogInfo     StockID = "ctk-dialog-info"
	StockDialogQuestion StockID = "ctk-dialog-question"
	StockDialogWarning  StockID = "ctk-dialog-warning"
	StockDirectory      StockID = "ctk-directory"
	StockDiscard        StockID = "ctk-discard"
	StockDisconnect     StockID = "ctk-disconnect"
	StockEdit           StockID = "ctk-edit"
	StockExecute        StockID = "ctk-execute"
	StockFile           StockID = "ctk-file"
	StockFind           StockID = "ctk-find"
	StockFindAndReplace StockID = "ctk-find-and-replace"
	StockGotoBottom     StockID = "ctk-goto-bottom"
	StockGotoFirst      StockID = "ctk-goto-first"
	StockGotoLast       StockID = "ctk-goto-last"
	StockGotoTop        StockID = "ctk-goto-top"
	StockGoBack         StockID = "ctk-go-back"
	StockGoDown         StockID = "ctk-go-down"
	StockGoForward      StockID = "ctk-go-forward"
	StockGoUp           StockID = "ctk-go-up"
	StockHelp           StockID = "ctk-help"
	StockHome           StockID = "ctk-home"
	StockIndent         StockID = "ctk-indent"
	StockIndex          StockID = "ctk-index"
	StockInfo           StockID = "ctk-info"
	StockItalic         StockID = "ctk-italic"
	StockJumpTo         StockID = "ctk-jump-to"
	StockJustifyCenter  StockID = "ctk-justify-center"
	StockJustifyFill    StockID = "ctk-justify-fill"
	StockJustifyLeft    StockID = "ctk-justify-left"
	StockJustifyRight   StockID = "ctk-justify-right"
	StockMediaForward   StockID = "ctk-media-forward"
	StockMediaNext      StockID = "ctk-media-next"
	StockMediaPause     StockID = "ctk-media-pause"
	StockMediaPlay      StockID = "ctk-media-play"
	StockMediaPrevious  StockID = "ctk-media-previous"
	StockMediaRecord    StockID = "ctk-media-record"
	StockMediaRewind    StockID = "ctk-media-rewind"
	StockMediaStop      StockID = "ctk-media-stop"
	StockNew            StockID = "ctk-new"
	StockNo             StockID = "ctk-no"
	StockOk             StockID = "ctk-ok"
	StockOpen           StockID = "ctk-open"
	StockPaste          StockID = "ctk-paste"
	StockPreferences    StockID = "ctk-preferences"
	StockProperties     StockID = "ctk-properties"
	StockQuit           StockID = "ctk-quit"
	StockRedo           StockID = "ctk-redo"
	StockRefresh        StockID = "ctk-refresh"
	StockRemove         StockID = "ctk-remove"
	StockRevertToSaved  StockID = "ctk-revert-to-saved"
	StockSave           StockID = "ctk-save"
	StockSaveAs         StockID = "ctk-save-as"
	StockSelectAll      StockID = "ctk-select-all"
	StockSelectColor    StockID = "ctk-select-color"
	StockSelectFont     StockID = "ctk-select-font"
	StockSortAscending  StockID = "ctk-sort-ascending"
	StockSortDescending StockID = "ctk-sort-descending"
	StockStop           StockID = "ctk-stop"
	StockStrikethrough  StockID = "ctk-strikethrough"
	StockUndelete       StockID = "ctk-undelete"
	StockUnderline      StockID = "ctk-underline"
	StockUndo           StockID = "ctk-undo"
	StockUnindent       StockID = "ctk-unindent"
	StockYes            StockID = "ctk-yes"
	StockZoom100        StockID = "ctk-zoom-100"
	StockZoomFit        StockID = "ctk-zoom-fit"
	StockZoomIn         StockID = "ctk-zoom-in"
	StockZoomOut        StockID = "ctk-zoom-out"
)

func ListStockIDs 

func ListStockIDs() (list []StockID)

Retrieves a list of all known stock IDs added to an IconFactory or registered with StockAdd().

type StockItem 

type StockItem struct {
	ID         StockID
	Label      string
	Modifier   ModifierType
	KeyVal     cdk.Key
	I18nDomain string
}

func LookupStockItem 

func LookupStockItem(id StockID) (item *StockItem)

Retrieve a stock item by ID. Returns nil if item not found.

type Style 

type Style interface {
	Object

	Init() (already bool)
	Copy() (value Style)
	Attach(window Window) (value Style)
	Detach()
	ApplyDefaultBackground(window Window, setBg bool, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	LookupColor(colorName string, color cdk.Color) (value bool)
	Get(widgetType cdk.CTypeTag, firstPropertyName string, argv ...interface{})
	PaintArrow(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, arrowType ArrowType, fill bool, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintBox(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintBoxGap(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType, gapX int, gapWidth int)
	PaintCheck(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintDiamond(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintExtension(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType)
	PaintFlatBox(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintFocus(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintHandle(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, orientation cdk.Orientation)
	PaintHLine(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x1 int, x2 int, y int)
	PaintOption(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintPolygon(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, points cdk.Point2I, nPoints int, fill bool)
	PaintShadow(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintShadowGap(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, gapSide PositionType, gapX int, gapWidth int)
	PaintSlider(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int, orientation cdk.Orientation)
	PaintSpinner(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, step int, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintTab(window Window, stateType StateType, shadowType ShadowType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	PaintVLine(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, y1 int, y2 int, x int)
	PaintExpander(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, expanderStyle ExpanderStyle)
	// PaintLayout(window Window, stateType StateType, useText bool, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, x int, y int, layout PangoLayout)
	PaintResizeGrip(window Window, stateType StateType, area cdk.Rectangle, widget Widget, detail string, edge WindowEdge, x int, y int, width int, height int)
	BorderNew() (value cdk.Border)
	BorderCopy(border cdk.Border) (value cdk.Border)
	BorderFree(border cdk.Border)
}

Style Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Style

type StyleSheet 

type StyleSheet struct {
	Lexer      *tcss.Lexer
	Rules      []*StyleSheetRule
	MediaRules []*StyleSheetMedia
}

func NewStyleSheet 

func NewStyleSheet() *StyleSheet

func (*StyleSheet) ParseString 

func (s *StyleSheet) ParseString(source string) (err error)

func (StyleSheet) SelectProperties 

func (s StyleSheet) SelectProperties(path string) (properties map[string]*StyleSheetProperty)

func (StyleSheet) String 

func (s StyleSheet) String() string

type StyleSheetMedia 

type StyleSheetMedia struct {
	Conditions string
	Rules      []*StyleSheetRule
}

func (StyleSheetMedia) String 

func (m StyleSheetMedia) String() string

type StyleSheetProperty 

type StyleSheetProperty struct {
	Key   string
	Value string
	Type  tcss.TokenType
}

func (StyleSheetProperty) String 

func (e StyleSheetProperty) String() string

type StyleSheetRule 

type StyleSheetRule struct {
	Selector   string
	Properties []*StyleSheetProperty
}

func (StyleSheetRule) String 

func (r StyleSheetRule) String() string

type StyleSheetSelector 

type StyleSheetSelector struct {
	Name  string
	Type  string
	Class string
	State string
}

func ParseSelector 

func ParseSelector(path string) (selector *StyleSheetSelector)

func (StyleSheetSelector) Match 

func (s StyleSheetSelector) Match(selector *StyleSheetSelector) (score int)

func (StyleSheetSelector) String 

func (s StyleSheetSelector) String() string
type SubmenuDirection uint64

Submenu direction 

const (
	DIRECTION_LEFT SubmenuDirection = iota
	DIRECTION_RIGHT
)
type SubmenuPlacement uint64

Submenu placement 

const (
	TOP_BOTTOM SubmenuPlacement = iota
	LEFT_RIGHT
)

type TextBufferTargetInfo 

type TextBufferTargetInfo int

Text buffer target info 

const (
	TEXT_BUFFER_TARGET_INFO_BUFFER_CONTENTS TextBufferTargetInfo = -1
	TEXT_BUFFER_TARGET_INFO_RICH_TEXT       TextBufferTargetInfo = -2
	TEXT_BUFFER_TARGET_INFO_TEXT            TextBufferTargetInfo = -3
)

type TextDirection 

type TextDirection uint64

Text direction 

const (
	TextDirNone TextDirection = iota
	TextDirLtr
	TextDirRtl
)

type TextSearchFlags 

type TextSearchFlags uint64

Text search flags 

const (
	TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY TextSearchFlags = 1 << 0
	TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY    TextSearchFlags = 1 << iota
)

type TextWindowType 

type TextWindowType uint64

Text window type 

const (
	TEXT_WINDOW_PRIVATE TextWindowType = iota
	TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET
	TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT
	TEXT_WINDOW_LEFT
	TEXT_WINDOW_RIGHT
	TEXT_WINDOW_TOP
	TEXT_WINDOW_BOTTOM
)

type TokenType 

type TokenType uint64

Token type 

const (
	TOKEN_EOF   TokenType = 0
	TOKEN_NONE  TokenType = 256
	TOKEN_ERROR TokenType = iota
	TOKEN_CHAR
	TOKEN_BINARY
	TOKEN_OCTAL
	TOKEN_INT
	TOKEN_HEX
	TOKEN_FLOAT
	TOKEN_STRING
	TOKEN_SYMBOL
	TOKEN_IDENTIFIER
	TOKEN_IDENTIFIER_NULL
	TOKEN_COMMENT_SINGLE
	TOKEN_COMMENT_MULTI
	TOKEN_LAST
)

type ToolbarChildType 

type ToolbarChildType uint64

Toolbar child type 

const (
	TOOLBAR_CHILD_SPACE ToolbarChildType = iota
	TOOLBAR_CHILD_BUTTON
	TOOLBAR_CHILD_TOGGLEBUTTON
	TOOLBAR_CHILD_RADIOBUTTON
	TOOLBAR_CHILD_WIDGET
)

type ToolbarSpaceStyle 

type ToolbarSpaceStyle uint64

Toolbar space style 

const (
	TOOLBAR_SPACE_EMPTY ToolbarSpaceStyle = iota
	TOOLBAR_SPACE_LINE
)

type ToolbarStyle 

type ToolbarStyle uint64

Toolbar style 

const (
	TOOLBAR_ICONS ToolbarStyle = iota
	TOOLBAR_TEXT
	TOOLBAR_BOTH
	TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ
)

type TreeModelFlags 

type TreeModelFlags uint64

Tree model flags 

const (
	TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST TreeModelFlags = 1 << 0
	TREE_MODEL_LIST_ONLY     TreeModelFlags = 1 << iota
)

type TreeViewColumnSizing 

type TreeViewColumnSizing uint64

Tree view column sizing 

const (
	TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY TreeViewColumnSizing = iota
	TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE
	TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED
)

type TreeViewDropPosition 

type TreeViewDropPosition uint64

Tree view drop position 

const (
	TREE_VIEW_DROP_BEFORE TreeViewDropPosition = iota
	TREE_VIEW_DROP_AFTER
	TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_BEFORE
	TREE_VIEW_DROP_INTO_OR_AFTER
)

type TreeViewFlags 

type TreeViewFlags uint64

Tree view flags 

const (
	TREE_VIEW_IS_LIST        TreeViewFlags = 1 << 0
	TREE_VIEW_SHOW_EXPANDERS TreeViewFlags = 1 << iota
	TREE_VIEW_IN_COLUMN_RESIZE
	TREE_VIEW_ARROW_PRELIT
	TREE_VIEW_HEADERS_VISIBLE
	TREE_VIEW_DRAW_KEYFOCUS
	TREE_VIEW_MODEL_SETUP
	TREE_VIEW_IN_COLUMN_DRAG
)

type TreeViewGridLines 

type TreeViewGridLines uint64

Tree view grid lines 

const (
	TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_NONE TreeViewGridLines = iota
	TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_HORIZONTAL
	TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_VERTICAL
	TREE_VIEW_GRID_LINES_BOTH
)

type TreeViewMode 

type TreeViewMode uint64

Tree view mode 

const (
	TREE_VIEW_LINE TreeViewMode = iota
	TREE_VIEW_ITEM
)

type UIManagerItemType 

type UIManagerItemType uint64

Manager item type 

const (
	UI_MANAGER_AUTO    UIManagerItemType = 0
	UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR UIManagerItemType = 1 << 0
	UI_MANAGER_MENU    UIManagerItemType = 1 << iota
	UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR
	UI_MANAGER_PLACEHOLDER
	UI_MANAGER_POPUP
	UI_MANAGER_MENUITEM
	UI_MANAGER_TOOLITEM
	UI_MANAGER_SEPARATOR
	UI_MANAGER_ACCELERATOR
	UI_MANAGER_POPUP_WITH_ACCELS
)

type Unit 

type Unit uint64

Unit 

const (
	UNIT_PIXEL Unit = iota
	UNIT_POINTS
	UNIT_INCH
	UNIT_MM
)

type UpdateType 

type UpdateType uint64

Update type 

const (
	UpdateContinuous UpdateType = iota
	UpdateDiscontinuous
	UpdateDelayed
)

func (UpdateType) FromString 

func (t UpdateType) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type VBox 

type VBox interface {
	Box

	Init() bool
}

Basic vbox interface

type VButtonBox 

type VButtonBox interface {
	ButtonBox

	Init() bool
}

type VScrollbar 

type VScrollbar interface {
	Scrollbar

	Init() (already bool)
}

type Viewport 

type Viewport interface {
	Bin

	Init() (already bool)
	GetHAdjustment() *CAdjustment
	SetHAdjustment(adjustment *CAdjustment)
	GetVAdjustment() *CAdjustment
	SetVAdjustment(adjustment *CAdjustment)
	SetShadowType(shadowType ShadowType)
	GetShadowType() (value ShadowType)
	GetBinWindow() (value Window)
	GetViewWindow() (value Window)
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Viewport Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Viewport

The Viewport widget acts as an adaptor class, implementing scrollability for child widgets that lack their own scrolling capabilities. Use Viewport to scroll child widgets such as Table, Box, and so on. If a widget has native scrolling abilities, such as TextView, TreeView or Iconview, it can be added to a ScrolledWindow with ContainerAdd. If a widget does not, you must first add the widget to a Viewport, then add the viewport to the scrolled window. The convenience function ScrolledWindowAddWithViewport does exactly this, so you can ignore the presence of the viewport.

type Visibility 

type Visibility uint64

Visibility 

const (
	VISIBILITY_NONE Visibility = iota
	VISIBILITY_PARTIAL
	VISIBILITY_FULL
)

type Widget 

type Widget interface {
	Object

	Init() (already bool)
	GtkCallback(data interface{})
	Destroy()
	Destroyed(widgetPointer Widget)
	Unparent()
	Show()
	ShowNow()
	Hide()
	ShowAll()
	Map()
	Unmap()
	Realize()
	Unrealize()
	QueueDraw()
	QueueResizeNoRedraw()
	AddAccelerator(accelSignal string, accelGroup AccelGroup, accelKey int, accelMods ModifierType, accelFlags AccelFlags)
	RemoveAccelerator(accelGroup AccelGroup, accelKey int, accelMods ModifierType) (value bool)
	SetAccelPath(accelPath string, accelGroup AccelGroup)
	ListAccelClosures() (value cdk.CList)
	CanActivateAccel(signalId int) (value bool)
	Event(event cdk.Event) (value bool)
	Activate() (value bool)
	Reparent(parent Container)
	Intersect(area cdk.Rectangle, intersection cdk.Rectangle) (value bool)
	IsFocus() (value bool)
	GrabFocus()
	GrabDefault()
	SetName(name string)
	GetName() (value string)
	SetState(state StateType)
	SetSensitive(sensitive bool)
	SetParent(parent Container)
	SetParentWindow(parentWindow Window)
	GetParentWindow() (value Window)
	SetEvents(events cdk.EventMask)
	AddEvents(events cdk.EventMask)
	GetToplevel() (value Widget)
	GetAncestor(widgetType cdk.CTypeTag) (value Widget)
	GetColormap() (value cdk.Colormap)
	SetColormap(colormap cdk.Colormap)
	GetVisual() (value cdk.Visual)
	GetEvents() (value cdk.EventMask)
	GetPointer(x int, y int)
	IsAncestor(ancestor Widget) (value bool)
	TranslateCoordinates(destWidget Widget, srcX int, srcY int, destX int, destY int) (value bool)
	HideOnDelete() (value bool)
	SetStyle(style Style)
	EnsureStyle()
	GetStyle() (value Style)
	ResetRcStyles()
	PushColormap(cmap cdk.Colormap)
	PopColormap()
	SetDefaultColormap(colormap cdk.Colormap)
	GetDefaultStyle() (value Style)
	GetDefaultColormap() (value cdk.Colormap)
	GetDefaultVisual() (value cdk.Visual)
	SetDirection(dir TextDirection)
	GetDirection() (value TextDirection)
	SetDefaultDirection(dir TextDirection)
	GetDefaultDirection() (value TextDirection)
	Path() (path string)
	ClassPath(pathLength int, path string, pathReversed string)
	GetCompositeName() (value string)
	ModifyStyle(style RcStyle)
	GetModifierStyle() (value RcStyle)
	ModifyFg(state StateType, color cdk.Color)
	ModifyBg(state StateType, color cdk.Color)
	ModifyText(state StateType, color cdk.Color)
	ModifyBase(state StateType, color cdk.Color)
	ModifyCursor(primary cdk.Color, secondary cdk.Color)
	PopCompositeChild()
	PushCompositeChild()
	QueueDrawArea(x int, y int, width int, height int)
	SetAppPaintable(appPaintable bool)
	SetDoubleBuffered(doubleBuffered bool)
	SetRedrawOnAllocate(redrawOnAllocate bool)
	SetCompositeName(name string)
	SetScrollAdjustments(hadjustment Adjustment, vadjustment Adjustment) (value bool)
	RegionIntersect(region cdk.Region) (value cdk.Region)
	SendExpose(event cdk.Event) (value int)
	SendFocusChange(event cdk.Event) (value bool)
	ChildFocus(direction DirectionType) (value bool)
	ChildNotify(childProperty string)
	FreezeChildNotify()
	GetChildVisible() (value bool)
	GetParent() (value Container)
	GetDisplay() (value cdk.DisplayManager)
	GetRootWindow() (value Window)
	GetScreen() (value cdk.Display)
	HasScreen() (value bool)
	GetSizeRequest() (width, height int)
	SizeRequest() cdk.Rectangle
	SetChildVisible(isVisible bool)
	SetSizeRequest(width, height int)
	ThawChildNotify()
	SetNoShowAll(noShowAll bool)
	GetNoShowAll() (value bool)
	ListMnemonicLabels() (value cdk.CList)
	AddMnemonicLabel(label Widget)
	RemoveMnemonicLabel(label Widget)
	IsComposited() (value bool)
	ErrorBell()
	KeynavFailed(direction DirectionType) (value bool)
	GetTooltipMarkup() (value string)
	SetTooltipMarkup(markup string)
	GetTooltipText() (value string)
	SetTooltipText(text string)
	GetTooltipWindow() (value Window)
	SetTooltipWindow(customWindow Window)
	GetHasTooltip() (value bool)
	SetHasTooltip(hasTooltip bool)
	TriggerTooltipQuery()
	GetSnapshot(clipRect cdk.Rectangle) (value cdk.Pixmap)
	GetWindow() (window Window)
	GetAppPaintable() (value bool)
	GetCanDefault() (value bool)
	SetCanDefault(canDefault bool)
	GetCanFocus() (value bool)
	SetCanFocus(canFocus bool)
	GetDoubleBuffered() (value bool)
	GetHasWindow() (value bool)
	SetHasWindow(hasWindow bool)
	GetSensitive() (value bool)
	IsSensitive() bool
	GetState() (value StateType)
	GetVisible() (value bool)
	SetVisible(visible bool)
	HasDefault() (value bool)
	HasFocus() (value bool)
	HasGrab() (value bool)
	HasRcStyle() (value bool)
	IsDrawable() (value bool)
	IsToplevel() (value bool)
	SetWindow(window Window)
	SetReceivesDefault(receivesDefault bool)
	GetReceivesDefault() (value bool)
	SetRealized(realized bool)
	GetRealized() (value bool)
	SetMapped(mapped bool)
	GetMapped() (value bool)
	GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)
	SetTheme(theme cdk.Theme)
	HasState(s StateType) bool
	UnsetState(v StateType)
	GetFlags() WidgetFlags
	HasFlags(f WidgetFlags) bool
	UnsetFlags(v WidgetFlags)
	SetFlags(v WidgetFlags)
	IsParentFocused() bool
	IsFocused() bool
	CanFocus() bool
	IsDefault() bool
	CanDefault() bool
	IsVisible() bool
	HasEventFocus() bool
	GrabEventFocus()
	ReleaseEventFocus()
	GetTopParent() (parent Container)
	GetWidgetAt(p *cdk.Point2I) Widget
}

Widget Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
    +- Misc
    +- Calendar
    +- CellView
    +- DrawingArea
    +- Entry
    +- Ruler
    +- Range
    +- Separator
    +- HSV
    +- Invisible
    +- OldEditable
    +- Preview
    +- Progress

Widget is the base class all widgets in CTK derive from. It manages the widget lifecycle, states and style. Widget introduces style properties - these are basically object properties that are stored not on the object, but in the style object associated to the widget. Style properties are set in resource files. This mechanism is used for configuring such things as the location of the scrollbar arrows through the theme, giving theme authors more control over the look of applications without the need to write a theme engine in C. Use ClassInstallStyleProperty to install style properties for a widget class, ClassFindStyleProperty or ClassListStyleProperties to get information about existing style properties and StyleGetProperty, StyleGet or StyleGetValist to obtain the value of a style property. The Widget implementation of the Buildable interface supports a custom <accelerator> element, which has attributes named key, modifiers and signal and allows to specify accelerators. Example 14. A UI definition fragment specifying an accelerator In addition to accelerators, Widget also support a custom <accessible> element, which supports actions and relations. Properties on the accessible implementation of an object can be set by accessing the internal child "accessible" of a Widget. Example 15. A UI definition fragment specifying an accessible

type WidgetFlags 

type WidgetFlags uint64

Widget flags 

const (
	NULL_WIDGET_FLAG WidgetFlags = 0
	TOPLEVEL         WidgetFlags = 1 << (iota + 2)
	NO_WINDOW
	REALIZED
	MAPPED
	VISIBLE
	SENSITIVE
	PARENT_SENSITIVE
	CAN_FOCUS
	HAS_FOCUS
	CAN_DEFAULT
	HAS_DEFAULT
	HAS_GRAB
	RC_STYLE
	COMPOSITE_CHILD
	NO_REPARENT
	APP_PAINTABLE
	RECEIVES_DEFAULT
	DOUBLE_BUFFERED
	NO_SHOW_ALL
	INVALID_WIDGET_FLAG
)

func (WidgetFlags) HasBit 

func (f WidgetFlags) HasBit(flag WidgetFlags) bool

type WidgetHelpType 

type WidgetHelpType uint64

Widget help type 

const (
	WIDGET_HELP_TOOLTIP WidgetHelpType = iota
	WIDGET_HELP_WHATS_THIS
)

type Window 

type Window interface {
	Bin
	cdk.Window

	Init() (already bool)
	Build(builder Builder, element *CBuilderElement) error
	SetTitle(title string)
	SetWmClass(wmClassName string, wmClassClass string)
	SetResizable(resizable bool)
	GetResizable() (value bool)
	AddAccelGroup(accelGroup AccelGroup)
	RemoveAccelGroup(accelGroup AccelGroup)
	ActivateFocus() (value bool)
	ActivateDefault() (value bool)
	SetModal(modal bool)
	SetPosition(position WindowPosition)
	SetTransientFor(parent Window)
	SetDestroyWithParent(setting bool)
	IsActive() (active bool)
	HasToplevelFocus() (focused bool)
	ListTopLevels() (value []Window)
	AddMnemonic(keyval rune, target interface{})
	RemoveMnemonic(keyval rune, target interface{})
	RemoveWidgetMnemonics(target interface{})
	MnemonicActivate(keyval rune, modifier cdk.ModMask) (activated bool)
	ActivateKey(event cdk.EventKey) (value bool)
	PropagateKeyEvent(event cdk.EventKey) (value bool)
	GetFocus() (focus interface{})
	SetFocus(focus interface{})
	GetDefaultWidget() (value Widget)
	SetDefault(defaultWidget Widget)
	Present()
	PresentWithTime(timestamp int)
	Iconify()
	Deiconify()
	Stick()
	Unstick()
	Maximize()
	Unmaximize()
	Fullscreen()
	Unfullscreen()
	SetKeepAbove(setting bool)
	SetKeepBelow(setting bool)
	SetDecorated(setting bool)
	SetDeletable(setting bool)
	SetMnemonicModifier(modifier cdk.ModMask)
	SetSkipTaskbarHint(setting bool)
	SetSkipPagerHint(setting bool)
	SetUrgencyHint(setting bool)
	SetAcceptFocus(setting bool)
	SetFocusOnMap(setting bool)
	SetStartupId(startupId string)
	SetRole(role string)
	GetDecorated() (value bool)
	GetDeletable() (value bool)
	GetDefaultSize(width int, height int)
	GetDestroyWithParent() (value bool)
	GetMnemonicModifier() (value cdk.ModMask)
	GetModal() (value bool)
	GetPosition(rootX int, rootY int)
	GetRole() (value string)
	GetSize() (width, height int)
	GetTitle() (value string)
	GetTransientFor() (value Window)
	GetSkipTaskbarHint() (value bool)
	GetSkipPagerHint() (value bool)
	GetUrgencyHint() (value bool)
	GetAcceptFocus() (value bool)
	GetFocusOnMap() (value bool)
	HasGroup() (value bool)
	Move(x int, y int)
	ParseGeometry(geometry string) (value bool)
	ReshowWithInitialSize()
	Resize() cdk.EventFlag
	SetAutoStartupNotification(setting bool)
	GetOpacity() (value float64)
	SetOpacity(opacity float64)
	GetMnemonicsVisible() (value bool)
	SetMnemonicsVisible(setting bool)
	GetDisplayManager() (dm cdk.DisplayManager)
	SetDisplayManager(dm cdk.DisplayManager)
	GetVBox() (vbox VBox)
	GetNextFocus() (next interface{})
	GetPreviousFocus() (previous interface{})
	FocusNext() cdk.EventFlag
	FocusPrevious() cdk.EventFlag
	GetEventFocus() (o interface{})
	SetEventFocus(o interface{})
	ProcessEvent(evt cdk.Event) cdk.EventFlag
	GetThemeRequest() (theme cdk.Theme)
	Invalidate() cdk.EventFlag
	Draw(canvas cdk.Canvas) cdk.EventFlag
}

Window Hierarchy: 

Object
  +- Widget
    +- Container
      +- Bin
        +- Window
          +- Dialog
          +- Assistant
          +- OffscreenWindow
          +- Plug

In the Curses Tool Kit, the Window type is an extension of the CTK Bin type and also embeds the cdk.Window interface so that it can be utilized within the Curses Development Kit framework. A Window is a TOPLEVEL Widget that can contain other widgets.

type WindowEdge 

type WindowEdge uint64
const (
	WindowEdgeNone WindowEdge = iota
	WindowEdgeNorthWest
	WindowEdgeNorth
	WindowEdgeNorthEast
	WindowEdgeWest
	WindowEdgeEast
	WindowEdgeSouthWest
	WindowEdgeSouth
	WindowEdgeSouthEast
)

func (WindowEdge) FromString 

func (e WindowEdge) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type WindowPosition 

type WindowPosition uint64

Window position 

const (
	WinPosNone WindowPosition = iota
	WinPosCenter
	WinPosMouse
	WinPosCenterAlways
	WinPosCenterOnParent
)

type WindowType 

type WindowType uint64

Window type 

const (
	WindowTopLevel WindowType = iota
	WindowPopup
)

func (WindowType) FromString 

func (t WindowType) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type WindowTypeHint 

type WindowTypeHint uint64
const (
	// A normal toplevel window.
	WindowTypeHintNormal WindowTypeHint = iota
	// A dialog window.
	WindowTypeHintDialog
	// A window used to implement a menu.
	WindowTypeHintMenu
	// A window used to implement a toolbar.
	WindowTypeHintToolbar
	// A window used to implement a splash screen
	WindowTypeHintSplashscreen
	//
	WindowTypeHintUtility
	// A window used to implement a docking bar.
	WindowTypeHintDock
	// A window used to implement a desktop.
	WindowTypeHintDesktop
	// A menu that belongs to a menubar.
	WindowTypeHintDropdownMenu
	// A menu that does not belong to a menubar, e.g. a context menu.
	WindowTypeHintPopupMenu
	// A tooltip.
	WindowTypeHintTooltip
	// A notification - typically a "bubble" that belongs to a status icon.
	WindowTypeHintNotification
	// A popup from a combo box.
	WindowTypeHintCombo
	// A window that is used to implement a DND cursor.
	WindowTypeHintDND
)

func (WindowTypeHint) FromString 

func (t WindowTypeHint) FromString(value string) (enum interface{}, err error)

type WithFakeWindowFn 

type WithFakeWindowFn = func(w Window)

Source Files

View all Source files

Jump to

Keyboard shortcuts

? : This menu
/ : Search site
f or F : Jump to
y or Y : Canonical URL
go.dev uses cookies from Google to deliver and enhance the quality of its services and to analyze traffic. Learn more.